Adding upstream version 3.5.24.upstream/3.5.24upstream

Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>

30 files changed, 9162 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/man/man8/anvil.8 b/man/man8/anvil.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..89ea9a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/anvil.8
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+.TH ANVIL 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+anvil
+\-
+Postfix session count and request rate control
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBanvil\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The Postfix \fBanvil\fR(8) server maintains statistics about
+client connection counts or client request rates. This
+information can be used to defend against clients that
+hammer a server with either too many simultaneous sessions,
+or with too many successive requests within a configurable
+time interval.  This server is designed to run under control
+by the Postfix \fBmaster\fR(8) server.
+
+In the following text, \fBident\fR specifies a (service,
+client) combination. The exact syntax of that information
+is application\-dependent; the \fBanvil\fR(8) server does
+not care.
+.SH "CONNECTION COUNT/RATE CONTROL"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+To register a new connection send the following request to
+the \fBanvil\fR(8) server:
+
+.nf
+    \fBrequest=connect\fR
+    \fBident=\fIstring\fR
+.fi
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server answers with the number of
+simultaneous connections and the number of connections per
+unit time for the (service, client) combination specified
+with \fBident\fR:
+
+.nf
+    \fBstatus=0\fR
+    \fBcount=\fInumber\fR
+    \fBrate=\fInumber\fR
+.fi
+
+To register a disconnect event send the following request
+to the \fBanvil\fR(8) server:
+
+.nf
+    \fBrequest=disconnect\fR
+    \fBident=\fIstring\fR
+.fi
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server replies with:
+
+.nf
+    \fBstatus=0\fR
+.fi
+.SH "MESSAGE RATE CONTROL"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+To register a message delivery request send the following
+request to the \fBanvil\fR(8) server:
+
+.nf
+    \fBrequest=message\fR
+    \fBident=\fIstring\fR
+.fi
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server answers with the number of message
+delivery requests per unit time for the (service, client)
+combination specified with \fBident\fR:
+
+.nf
+    \fBstatus=0\fR
+    \fBrate=\fInumber\fR
+.fi
+.SH "RECIPIENT RATE CONTROL"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+To register a recipient request send the following request
+to the \fBanvil\fR(8) server:
+
+.nf
+    \fBrequest=recipient\fR
+    \fBident=\fIstring\fR
+.fi
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server answers with the number of recipient
+addresses per unit time for the (service, client) combination
+specified with \fBident\fR:
+
+.nf
+    \fBstatus=0\fR
+    \fBrate=\fInumber\fR
+.fi
+.SH "TLS SESSION NEGOTIATION RATE CONTROL"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The features described in this section are available with
+Postfix 2.3 and later.
+
+To register a request for a new (i.e. not cached) TLS session
+send the following request to the \fBanvil\fR(8) server:
+
+.nf
+    \fBrequest=newtls\fR
+    \fBident=\fIstring\fR
+.fi
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server answers with the number of new
+TLS session requests per unit time for the (service, client)
+combination specified with \fBident\fR:
+
+.nf
+    \fBstatus=0\fR
+    \fBrate=\fInumber\fR
+.fi
+
+To retrieve new TLS session request rate information without
+updating the counter information, send:
+
+.nf
+    \fBrequest=newtls_report\fR
+    \fBident=\fIstring\fR
+.fi
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server answers with the number of new
+TLS session requests per unit time for the (service, client)
+combination specified with \fBident\fR:
+
+.nf
+    \fBstatus=0\fR
+    \fBrate=\fInumber\fR
+.fi
+.SH "AUTH RATE CONTROL"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+To register an AUTH request send the following request
+to the \fBanvil\fR(8) server:
+
+.nf
+    \fBrequest=auth\fR
+    \fBident=\fIstring\fR
+.fi
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server answers with the number of auth
+requests per unit time for the (service, client) combination
+specified with \fBident\fR:
+
+.nf
+    \fBstatus=0\fR
+    \fBrate=\fInumber\fR
+.fi
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server does not talk to the network or to local
+users, and can run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server maintains an in\-memory table with
+information about recent clients requests.  No persistent
+state is kept because standard system library routines are
+not sufficiently robust for update\-intensive applications.
+
+Although the in\-memory state is kept only temporarily, this
+may require a lot of memory on systems that handle connections
+from many remote clients.  To reduce memory usage, reduce
+the time unit over which state is kept.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+
+Upon exit, and every \fBanvil_status_update_time\fR
+seconds, the server logs the maximal count and rate values measured,
+together with (service, client) information and the time of day
+associated with those events.
+In order to avoid unnecessary overhead, no measurements
+are done for activity that isn't concurrency limited or
+rate limited.
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+Systems behind network address translating routers or proxies
+appear to have the same client address and can run into connection
+count and/or rate limits falsely.
+
+In this preliminary implementation, a count (or rate) limited server
+process can have only one remote client at a time. If a
+server process reports
+multiple simultaneous clients, state is kept only for the last
+reported client.
+
+The \fBanvil\fR(8) server automatically discards client
+request information after it expires.  To prevent the
+\fBanvil\fR(8) server from discarding client request rate
+information too early or too late, a rate limited service
+should always register connect/disconnect events even when
+it does not explicitly limit them.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+On low\-traffic mail systems, changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are
+picked up automatically as \fBanvil\fR(8) processes run for
+only a limited amount of time. On other mail systems, use
+the command "\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fBanvil_rate_time_unit (60s)\fR"
+The time unit over which client connection rates and other rates
+are calculated.
+.IP "\fBanvil_status_update_time (600s)\fR"
+How frequently the \fBanvil\fR(8) connection and rate limiting server
+logs peak usage information.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+smtpd(8), Postfix SMTP server
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+TUNING_README, performance tuning
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+The anvil service is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/bounce.8 b/man/man8/bounce.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a91b8a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/bounce.8
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+.TH BOUNCE 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+bounce
+\-
+Postfix delivery status reports
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBbounce\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBbounce\fR(8) daemon maintains per\-message log files with
+delivery status information. Each log file is named after the
+queue file that it corresponds to, and is kept in a queue subdirectory
+named after the service name in the \fBmaster.cf\fR file (either
+\fBbounce\fR, \fBdefer\fR or \fBtrace\fR).
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+The \fBbounce\fR(8) daemon processes two types of service requests:
+.IP \(bu
+Append a recipient (non\-)delivery status record to a per\-message
+log file.
+.IP \(bu
+Enqueue a delivery status notification message, with a copy
+of a per\-message log file and of the corresponding message.
+When the delivery status notification message is
+enqueued successfully, the per\-message log file is deleted.
+.PP
+The software does a best notification effort. A non\-delivery
+notification is sent even when the log file or the original
+message cannot be read.
+
+Optionally, a bounce (defer, trace) client can request that the
+per\-message log file be deleted when the requested operation fails.
+This is used by clients that cannot retry transactions by
+themselves, and that depend on retry logic in their own client.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 822 (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
+RFC 2045 (Format of Internet Message Bodies)
+RFC 2822 (Internet Message Format)
+RFC 3462 (Delivery Status Notifications)
+RFC 3464 (Delivery Status Notifications)
+RFC 3834 (Auto\-Submitted: message header)
+RFC 5322 (Internet Message Format)
+RFC 6531 (Internationalized SMTP)
+RFC 6532 (Internationalized Message Format)
+RFC 6533 (Internationalized Delivery Status Notifications)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as \fBbounce\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fB2bounce_notice_recipient (postmaster)\fR"
+The recipient of undeliverable mail that cannot be returned to
+the sender.
+.IP "\fBbackwards_bounce_logfile_compatibility (yes)\fR"
+Produce additional \fBbounce\fR(8) logfile records that can be read by
+Postfix versions before 2.0.
+.IP "\fBbounce_notice_recipient (postmaster)\fR"
+The recipient of postmaster notifications with the message headers
+of mail that Postfix did not deliver and of SMTP conversation
+transcripts of mail that Postfix did not receive.
+.IP "\fBbounce_size_limit (50000)\fR"
+The maximal amount of original message text that is sent in a
+non\-delivery notification.
+.IP "\fBbounce_template_file (empty)\fR"
+Pathname of a configuration file with bounce message templates.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBdelay_notice_recipient (postmaster)\fR"
+The recipient of postmaster notifications with the message headers
+of mail that cannot be delivered within $delay_warning_time time
+units.
+.IP "\fBdeliver_lock_attempts (20)\fR"
+The maximal number of attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a
+mailbox file or \fBbounce\fR(8) logfile.
+.IP "\fBdeliver_lock_delay (1s)\fR"
+The time between attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a mailbox
+file or \fBbounce\fR(8) logfile.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBinternal_mail_filter_classes (empty)\fR"
+What categories of Postfix\-generated mail are subject to
+before\-queue content inspection by non_smtpd_milters, header_checks
+and body_checks.
+.IP "\fBmail_name (Postfix)\fR"
+The mail system name that is displayed in Received: headers, in
+the SMTP greeting banner, and in bounced mail.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBnotify_classes (resource, software)\fR"
+The list of error classes that are reported to the postmaster.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_autodetect_classes (sendmail, verify)\fR"
+Detect that a message requires SMTPUTF8 support for the specified
+mail origin classes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+/var/spool/postfix/bounce/* non\-delivery records
+/var/spool/postfix/defer/* non\-delivery records
+/var/spool/postfix/trace/* delivery status records
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+bounce(5), bounce message template format
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/cleanup.8 b/man/man8/cleanup.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..173e8e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/cleanup.8
@@ -0,0 +1,495 @@
+.TH CLEANUP 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+cleanup
+\-
+canonicalize and enqueue Postfix message
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBcleanup\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBcleanup\fR(8) daemon processes inbound mail, inserts it
+into the \fBincoming\fR mail queue, and informs the queue
+manager of its arrival.
+
+The \fBcleanup\fR(8) daemon always performs the following transformations:
+.IP \(bu
+Insert missing message headers: (\fBResent\-\fR) \fBFrom:\fR,
+\fBTo:\fR, \fBMessage\-Id:\fR, and \fBDate:\fR.
+.IP \(bu
+Transform envelope and header addresses to the standard
+\fIuser@fully\-qualified\-domain\fR form that is expected by other
+Postfix programs.
+This task is delegated to the \fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR(8) daemon.
+.IP \(bu
+Eliminate duplicate envelope recipient addresses.
+.IP \(bu
+Remove message headers: \fBBcc\fR, \fBContent\-Length\fR,
+\fBResent\-Bcc\fR, \fBReturn\-Path\fR.
+.PP
+The following address transformations are optional:
+.IP \(bu
+Optionally, rewrite all envelope and header addresses according
+to the mappings specified in the \fBcanonical\fR(5) lookup tables.
+.IP \(bu
+Optionally, masquerade envelope sender addresses and message
+header addresses (i.e. strip host or domain information below
+all domains listed in the \fBmasquerade_domains\fR parameter,
+except for user names listed in \fBmasquerade_exceptions\fR).
+By default, address masquerading does not affect envelope recipients.
+.IP \(bu
+Optionally, expand envelope recipients according to information
+found in the \fBvirtual\fR(5) lookup tables.
+.PP
+The \fBcleanup\fR(8) daemon performs sanity checks on the content of
+each message. When it finds a problem, by default it returns a
+diagnostic status to the client, and leaves it up to the client
+to deal with the problem. Alternatively, the client can request
+the \fBcleanup\fR(8) daemon to bounce the message back to the sender
+in case of trouble.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 822 (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
+RFC 2045 (MIME: Format of Internet Message Bodies)
+RFC 2046 (MIME: Media Types)
+RFC 2822 (Internet Message Format)
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced Status Codes)
+RFC 3464 (Delivery status notifications)
+RFC 5322 (Internet Message Format)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+Table\-driven rewriting rules make it hard to express \fBif then
+else\fR and other logical relationships.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as
+\fBcleanup\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBundisclosed_recipients_header (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+Message header that the Postfix \fBcleanup\fR(8) server inserts when a
+message contains no To: or Cc: message header.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 only:
+.IP "\fBenable_errors_to (no)\fR"
+Report mail delivery errors to the address specified with the
+non\-standard Errors\-To: message header, instead of the envelope
+sender address (this feature is removed with Postfix version 2.2, is
+turned off by default with Postfix version 2.1, and is always turned on
+with older Postfix versions).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.6 and later:
+.IP "\fBalways_add_missing_headers (no)\fR"
+Always add (Resent\-) From:, To:, Date: or Message\-ID: headers
+when not present.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_long_queue_ids (no)\fR"
+Enable long, non\-repeating, queue IDs (queue file names).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBmessage_drop_headers (bcc, content\-length, resent\-bcc, return\-path)\fR"
+Names of message headers that the \fBcleanup\fR(8) daemon will remove
+after applying \fBheader_checks\fR(5) and before invoking Milter applications.
+.SH "BUILT-IN CONTENT FILTERING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Postfix built\-in content filtering is meant to stop a flood of
+worms or viruses. It is not a general content filter.
+.IP "\fBbody_checks (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables for content inspection as specified in
+the \fBbody_checks\fR(5) manual page.
+.IP "\fBheader_checks (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables for content inspection of primary non\-MIME
+message headers, as specified in the \fBheader_checks\fR(5) manual page.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBbody_checks_size_limit (51200)\fR"
+How much text in a message body segment (or attachment, if you
+prefer to use that term) is subjected to body_checks inspection.
+.IP "\fBmime_header_checks ($header_checks)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables for content inspection of MIME related
+message headers, as described in the \fBheader_checks\fR(5) manual page.
+.IP "\fBnested_header_checks ($header_checks)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables for content inspection of non\-MIME message
+headers in attached messages, as described in the \fBheader_checks\fR(5)
+manual page.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBmessage_reject_characters (empty)\fR"
+The set of characters that Postfix will reject in message
+content.
+.IP "\fBmessage_strip_characters (empty)\fR"
+The set of characters that Postfix will remove from message
+content.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.9, 3.8.5, 3.7.10, 3.6.14,
+3.5.24, and later:
+.IP "\fBcleanup_replace_stray_cr_lf (yes)\fR"
+Replace each stray <CR> or <LF> character in message
+content with a space character, to prevent outbound SMTP smuggling,
+and to make the evaluation of Postfix\-added DKIM or other signatures
+independent from how a remote mail server handles such characters.
+.SH "BEFORE QUEUE MILTER CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+As of version 2.3, Postfix supports the Sendmail version 8
+Milter (mail filter) protocol. When mail is not received via
+the smtpd(8) server, the cleanup(8) server will simulate
+SMTP events to the extent that this is possible. For details
+see the MILTER_README document.
+.IP "\fBnon_smtpd_milters (empty)\fR"
+A list of Milter (mail filter) applications for new mail that
+does not arrive via the Postfix \fBsmtpd\fR(8) server.
+.IP "\fBmilter_protocol (6)\fR"
+The mail filter protocol version and optional protocol extensions
+for communication with a Milter application; prior to Postfix 2.6
+the default protocol is 2.
+.IP "\fBmilter_default_action (tempfail)\fR"
+The default action when a Milter (mail filter) application is
+unavailable or mis\-configured.
+.IP "\fBmilter_macro_daemon_name ($myhostname)\fR"
+The {daemon_name} macro value for Milter (mail filter) applications.
+.IP "\fBmilter_macro_v ($mail_name $mail_version)\fR"
+The {v} macro value for Milter (mail filter) applications.
+.IP "\fBmilter_connect_timeout (30s)\fR"
+The time limit for connecting to a Milter (mail filter)
+application, and for negotiating protocol options.
+.IP "\fBmilter_command_timeout (30s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending an SMTP command to a Milter (mail
+filter) application, and for receiving the response.
+.IP "\fBmilter_content_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending message content to a Milter (mail
+filter) application, and for receiving the response.
+.IP "\fBmilter_connect_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after completion of an SMTP connection.
+.IP "\fBmilter_helo_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the SMTP HELO or EHLO command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_mail_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the SMTP MAIL FROM command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_rcpt_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the SMTP RCPT TO command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_data_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to version 4 or higher Milter (mail
+filter) applications after the SMTP DATA command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_unknown_command_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to version 3 or higher Milter (mail
+filter) applications after an unknown SMTP command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_end_of_data_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the message end\-of\-data.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBmilter_end_of_header_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the end of the message header.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBmilter_header_checks (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables for content inspection of message headers
+that are produced by Milter applications.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBmilter_macro_defaults (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of \fIname=value\fR pairs that specify default
+values for arbitrary macros that Postfix may send to Milter
+applications.
+.SH "MIME PROCESSING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBdisable_mime_input_processing (no)\fR"
+Turn off MIME processing while receiving mail.
+.IP "\fBmime_boundary_length_limit (2048)\fR"
+The maximal length of MIME multipart boundary strings.
+.IP "\fBmime_nesting_limit (100)\fR"
+The maximal recursion level that the MIME processor will handle.
+.IP "\fBstrict_8bitmime (no)\fR"
+Enable both strict_7bit_headers and strict_8bitmime_body.
+.IP "\fBstrict_7bit_headers (no)\fR"
+Reject mail with 8\-bit text in message headers.
+.IP "\fBstrict_8bitmime_body (no)\fR"
+Reject 8\-bit message body text without 8\-bit MIME content encoding
+information.
+.IP "\fBstrict_mime_encoding_domain (no)\fR"
+Reject mail with invalid Content\-Transfer\-Encoding: information
+for the message/* or multipart/* MIME content types.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBdetect_8bit_encoding_header (yes)\fR"
+Automatically detect 8BITMIME body content by looking at
+Content\-Transfer\-Encoding: message headers; historically, this
+behavior was hard\-coded to be "always on".
+.SH "AUTOMATIC BCC RECIPIENT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Postfix can automatically add BCC (blind carbon copy)
+when mail enters the mail system:
+.IP "\fBalways_bcc (empty)\fR"
+Optional address that receives a "blind carbon copy" of each message
+that is received by the Postfix mail system.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsender_bcc_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional BCC (blind carbon\-copy) address lookup tables, indexed
+by sender address.
+.IP "\fBrecipient_bcc_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional BCC (blind carbon\-copy) address lookup tables, indexed by
+recipient address.
+.SH "ADDRESS TRANSFORMATION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Address rewriting is delegated to the \fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR(8) daemon.
+The \fBcleanup\fR(8) server implements table driven address mapping.
+.IP "\fBempty_address_recipient (MAILER\-DAEMON)\fR"
+The recipient of mail addressed to the null address.
+.IP "\fBcanonical_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional address mapping lookup tables for message headers and
+envelopes.
+.IP "\fBrecipient_canonical_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional address mapping lookup tables for envelope and header
+recipient addresses.
+.IP "\fBsender_canonical_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional address mapping lookup tables for envelope and header
+sender addresses.
+.IP "\fBmasquerade_classes (envelope_sender, header_sender, header_recipient)\fR"
+What addresses are subject to address masquerading.
+.IP "\fBmasquerade_domains (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of domains whose subdomain structure will be stripped
+off in email addresses.
+.IP "\fBmasquerade_exceptions (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of user names that are not subjected to address
+masquerading, even when their addresses match $masquerade_domains.
+.IP "\fBpropagate_unmatched_extensions (canonical, virtual)\fR"
+What address lookup tables copy an address extension from the lookup
+key to the lookup result.
+.PP
+Available before Postfix version 2.0:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with a) names of domains for which all
+addresses are aliased to addresses in other local or remote domains,
+and b) addresses that are aliased to addresses in other local or
+remote domains.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_alias_maps ($virtual_maps)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables that alias specific mail addresses or domains
+to other local or remote address.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBcanonical_classes (envelope_sender, envelope_recipient, header_sender, header_recipient)\fR"
+What addresses are subject to canonical_maps address mapping.
+.IP "\fBrecipient_canonical_classes (envelope_recipient, header_recipient)\fR"
+What addresses are subject to recipient_canonical_maps address
+mapping.
+.IP "\fBsender_canonical_classes (envelope_sender, header_sender)\fR"
+What addresses are subject to sender_canonical_maps address
+mapping.
+.IP "\fBremote_header_rewrite_domain (empty)\fR"
+Don't rewrite message headers from remote clients at all when
+this parameter is empty; otherwise, rewrite message headers and
+append the specified domain name to incomplete addresses.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBduplicate_filter_limit (1000)\fR"
+The maximal number of addresses remembered by the address
+duplicate filter for \fBaliases\fR(5) or \fBvirtual\fR(5) alias expansion, or
+for \fBshowq\fR(8) queue displays.
+.IP "\fBheader_size_limit (102400)\fR"
+The maximal amount of memory in bytes for storing a message header.
+.IP "\fBhopcount_limit (50)\fR"
+The maximal number of Received:  message headers that is allowed
+in the primary message headers.
+.IP "\fBin_flow_delay (1s)\fR"
+Time to pause before accepting a new message, when the message
+arrival rate exceeds the message delivery rate.
+.IP "\fBmessage_size_limit (10240000)\fR"
+The maximal size in bytes of a message, including envelope information.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBheader_address_token_limit (10240)\fR"
+The maximal number of address tokens are allowed in an address
+message header.
+.IP "\fBmime_boundary_length_limit (2048)\fR"
+The maximal length of MIME multipart boundary strings.
+.IP "\fBmime_nesting_limit (100)\fR"
+The maximal recursion level that the MIME processor will handle.
+.IP "\fBqueue_file_attribute_count_limit (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of (name=value) attributes that may be stored
+in a Postfix queue file.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_alias_expansion_limit (1000)\fR"
+The maximal number of addresses that virtual alias expansion produces
+from each original recipient.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_alias_recursion_limit (1000)\fR"
+The maximal nesting depth of virtual alias expansion.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_alias_address_length_limit (1000)\fR"
+The maximal length of an email address after virtual alias expansion.
+.SH "SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_enable (yes)\fR"
+Enable preliminary SMTPUTF8 support for the protocols described
+in RFC 6531..6533.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_autodetect_classes (sendmail, verify)\fR"
+Detect that a message requires SMTPUTF8 support for the specified
+mail origin classes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_idna2003_compatibility (no)\fR"
+Enable 'transitional' compatibility between IDNA2003 and IDNA2008,
+when converting UTF\-8 domain names to/from the ASCII form that is
+used for DNS lookups.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBdelay_warning_time (0h)\fR"
+The time after which the sender receives a copy of the message
+headers of mail that is still queued.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmyhostname (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The internet hostname of this mail system.
+.IP "\fBmyorigin ($myhostname)\fR"
+The domain name that locally\-posted mail appears to come
+from, and that locally posted mail is delivered to.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsoft_bounce (no)\fR"
+Safety net to keep mail queued that would otherwise be returned to
+the sender.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_original_recipient (yes)\fR"
+Enable support for the original recipient address after an
+address is rewritten to a different address (for example with
+aliasing or with canonical mapping).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.SH "FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+/etc/postfix/canonical*, canonical mapping table
+/etc/postfix/virtual*, virtual mapping table
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+trivial\-rewrite(8), address rewriting
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+header_checks(5), message header content inspection
+body_checks(5), body parts content inspection
+canonical(5), canonical address lookup table format
+virtual(5), virtual alias lookup table format
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+ADDRESS_REWRITING_README Postfix address manipulation
+CONTENT_INSPECTION_README content inspection
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/defer.8 b/man/man8/defer.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..411dfa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/defer.8
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man8/bounce.8
diff --git a/man/man8/discard.8 b/man/man8/discard.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7823891
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/discard.8
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+.TH DISCARD 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+discard
+\-
+Postfix discard mail delivery agent
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBdiscard\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The Postfix \fBdiscard\fR(8) delivery agent processes
+delivery requests from
+the queue manager. Each request specifies a queue file, a sender
+address, a next\-hop destination that is treated as the reason for
+discarding the mail, and recipient information.
+The reason may be prefixed with an RFC 3463\-compatible detail code.
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+The \fBdiscard\fR(8) delivery agent pretends to deliver all recipients
+in the delivery request, logs the "next\-hop" destination
+as the reason for discarding the mail, updates the
+queue file, and either marks recipients as finished or informs the
+queue manager that delivery should be tried again at a later time.
+
+Delivery status reports are sent to the \fBtrace\fR(8)
+daemon as appropriate.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBdiscard\fR(8) mailer is not security\-sensitive. It does not talk
+to the network, and can be run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced Status Codes)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+
+Depending on the setting of the \fBnotify_classes\fR parameter,
+the postmaster is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically as \fBdiscard\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBdouble_bounce_sender (double\-bounce)\fR"
+The sender address of postmaster notifications that are generated
+by the mail system.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+bounce(8), delivery status reports
+error(8), Postfix error delivery agent
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.2.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Victor Duchovni
+Morgan Stanley
+
+Based on code by:
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/dnsblog.8 b/man/man8/dnsblog.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..809e4ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/dnsblog.8
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+.TH DNSBLOG 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+dnsblog
+\-
+Postfix DNS white/blacklist logger
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBdnsblog\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBdnsblog\fR(8) server implements an ad\-hoc DNS
+white/blacklist lookup service. This may eventually be
+replaced by an UDP client that is built directly into the
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8) server.
+.SH "PROTOCOL"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+With each connection, the \fBdnsblog\fR(8) server receives
+a DNS white/blacklist domain name, an IP address, and an ID.
+If the IP address is listed under the DNS white/blacklist, the
+\fBdnsblog\fR(8) server logs the match and replies with the
+query arguments plus an address list with the resulting IP
+addresses, separated by whitespace, and the reply TTL.
+Otherwise it replies with the query arguments plus an empty
+address list and the reply TTL; the reply TTL is \-1 if there
+is no reply, or a negative reply that contains no SOA record.
+Finally, the \fBdnsblog\fR(8) server closes the connection.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as
+\fBdnsblog\fR(8) processes run for only a limited amount
+of time. Use the command "\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed
+up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_sites (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of DNS white/blacklist domains, filters and weight
+factors.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+smtpd(8), Postfix SMTP server
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.8.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/error.8 b/man/man8/error.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0dae3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/error.8
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+.TH ERROR 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+error
+\-
+Postfix error/retry mail delivery agent
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBerror\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The Postfix \fBerror\fR(8) delivery agent processes delivery
+requests from
+the queue manager. Each request specifies a queue file, a sender
+address, the reason for non\-delivery (specified as the
+next\-hop destination), and recipient information.
+The reason may be prefixed with an RFC 3463\-compatible detail code;
+if none is specified a default 4.0.0 or 5.0.0 code is used instead.
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+Depending on the service name in master.cf, \fBerror\fR
+or \fBretry\fR, the server bounces or defers all recipients
+in the delivery request using the "next\-hop" information
+as the reason for non\-delivery. The \fBretry\fR service name is
+supported as of Postfix 2.4.
+
+Delivery status reports are sent to the \fBbounce\fR(8),
+\fBdefer\fR(8) or \fBtrace\fR(8) daemon as appropriate.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBerror\fR(8) mailer is not security\-sensitive. It does not talk
+to the network, and can be run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced Status Codes)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+
+Depending on the setting of the \fBnotify_classes\fR parameter,
+the postmaster is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically as \fBerror\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fB2bounce_notice_recipient (postmaster)\fR"
+The recipient of undeliverable mail that cannot be returned to
+the sender.
+.IP "\fBbounce_notice_recipient (postmaster)\fR"
+The recipient of postmaster notifications with the message headers
+of mail that Postfix did not deliver and of SMTP conversation
+transcripts of mail that Postfix did not receive.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBdouble_bounce_sender (double\-bounce)\fR"
+The sender address of postmaster notifications that are generated
+by the mail system.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBnotify_classes (resource, software)\fR"
+The list of error classes that are reported to the postmaster.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+bounce(8), delivery status reports
+discard(8), Postfix discard delivery agent
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/flush.8 b/man/man8/flush.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1fdf05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/flush.8
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+.TH FLUSH 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+flush
+\-
+Postfix fast flush server
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBflush\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBflush\fR(8) server maintains a record of deferred
+mail by destination.
+This information is used to improve the performance of the SMTP
+\fBETRN\fR request, and of its command\-line equivalent,
+"\fBsendmail \-qR\fR" or "\fBpostqueue \-f\fR".
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+The record is implemented as a per\-destination logfile with
+as contents the queue IDs of deferred mail. A logfile is
+append\-only, and is truncated when delivery is requested
+for the corresponding destination. A destination is the
+part on the right\-hand side of the right\-most \fB@\fR in
+an email address.
+
+Per\-destination logfiles of deferred mail are maintained only for
+eligible destinations. The list of eligible destinations is
+specified with the \fBfast_flush_domains\fR configuration parameter,
+which defaults to \fB$relay_domains\fR.
+
+This server implements the following requests:
+.IP "\fBadd\fI sitename queueid\fR"
+Inform the \fBflush\fR(8) server that the message with the specified
+queue ID is queued for the specified destination.
+.IP "\fBsend_site\fI sitename\fR"
+Request delivery of mail that is queued for the specified
+destination.
+.IP "\fBsend_file\fI queueid\fR"
+Request delivery of the specified deferred message.
+.IP \fBrefresh\fR
+Refresh non\-empty per\-destination logfiles that were not read in
+\fB$fast_flush_refresh_time\fR hours, by simulating
+send requests (see above) for the corresponding destinations.
+.sp
+Delete empty per\-destination logfiles that were not updated in
+\fB$fast_flush_purge_time\fR days.
+.sp
+This request completes in the background.
+.IP \fBpurge\fR
+Do a \fBrefresh\fR for all per\-destination logfiles.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBflush\fR(8) server is not security\-sensitive. It does not
+talk to the network, and it does not talk to local users.
+The fast flush server can run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+Fast flush logfiles are truncated only after a "send"
+request, not when mail is actually delivered, and therefore can
+accumulate outdated or redundant data. In order to maintain sanity,
+"refresh" must be executed periodically. This can
+be automated with a suitable wakeup timer setting in the
+\fBmaster.cf\fR configuration file.
+
+Upon receipt of a request to deliver mail for an eligible
+destination, the \fBflush\fR(8) server requests delivery of all messages
+that are listed in that destination's logfile, regardless of the
+recipients of those messages. This is not an issue for mail
+that is sent to a \fBrelay_domains\fR destination because
+such mail typically only has recipients in one domain.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically as \fBflush\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBfast_flush_domains ($relay_domains)\fR"
+Optional list of destinations that are eligible for per\-destination
+logfiles with mail that is queued to those destinations.
+.IP "\fBfast_flush_refresh_time (12h)\fR"
+The time after which a non\-empty but unread per\-destination "fast
+flush" logfile needs to be refreshed.
+.IP "\fBfast_flush_purge_time (7d)\fR"
+The time after which an empty per\-destination "fast flush" logfile
+is deleted.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBparent_domain_matches_subdomains (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A list of Postfix features where the pattern "example.com" also
+matches subdomains of example.com,
+instead of requiring an explicit ".example.com" pattern.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+/var/spool/postfix/flush, "fast flush" logfiles.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+smtpd(8), SMTP server
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+ETRN_README, Postfix ETRN howto
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 1.0.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/lmtp.8 b/man/man8/lmtp.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..966d301
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/lmtp.8
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man8/smtp.8
diff --git a/man/man8/local.8 b/man/man8/local.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91fceb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/local.8
@@ -0,0 +1,658 @@
+.TH LOCAL 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+local
+\-
+Postfix local mail delivery
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBlocal\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBlocal\fR(8) daemon processes delivery requests from the
+Postfix queue manager to deliver mail to local recipients.
+Each delivery request specifies a queue file, a sender address,
+a domain or host to deliver to, and one or more recipients.
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+The \fBlocal\fR(8) daemon updates queue files and marks recipients
+as finished, or it informs the queue manager that delivery should
+be tried again at a later time. Delivery status reports are sent
+to the \fBbounce\fR(8), \fBdefer\fR(8) or \fBtrace\fR(8) daemon as
+appropriate.
+.SH "CASE FOLDING"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+All delivery decisions are made using the bare recipient
+name (i.e. the address localpart), folded to lower case.
+See also under ADDRESS EXTENSION below for a few exceptions.
+.SH "SYSTEM-WIDE AND USER-LEVEL ALIASING"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The system administrator can set up one or more system\-wide
+\fBsendmail\fR\-style alias databases.
+Users can have \fBsendmail\fR\-style ~/.\fBforward\fR files.
+Mail for \fIname\fR is delivered to the alias \fIname\fR, to
+destinations in ~\fIname\fR/.\fBforward\fR, to the mailbox owned
+by the user \fIname\fR, or it is sent back as undeliverable.
+
+The system administrator can specify a comma/space separated list
+of ~\fR/.\fBforward\fR like files through the \fBforward_path\fR
+configuration parameter. Upon delivery, the local delivery agent
+tries each pathname in the list until a file is found.
+
+Delivery via ~/.\fBforward\fR files is done with the privileges
+of the recipient.
+Thus, ~/.\fBforward\fR like files must be readable by the
+recipient, and their parent directory needs to have "execute"
+permission for the recipient.
+
+The \fBforward_path\fR parameter is subject to interpolation of
+\fB$user\fR (recipient username), \fB$home\fR (recipient home
+directory), \fB$shell\fR (recipient shell), \fB$recipient\fR
+(complete recipient address), \fB$extension\fR (recipient address
+extension), \fB$domain\fR (recipient domain), \fB$local\fR
+(entire recipient address localpart) and
+\fB$recipient_delimiter.\fR The forms \fI${name?value}\fR and
+\fI${name:value}\fR expand conditionally to \fIvalue\fR when
+\fI$name\fR is (is not) defined.
+Characters that may have special meaning to the shell or file system
+are replaced by underscores.  The list of acceptable characters
+is specified with the \fBforward_expansion_filter\fR configuration
+parameter.
+
+An alias or ~/.\fBforward\fR file may list any combination of external
+commands, destination file names, \fB:include:\fR directives, or
+mail addresses.
+See \fBaliases\fR(5) for a precise description. Each line in a
+user's .\fBforward\fR file has the same syntax as the right\-hand part
+of an alias.
+
+When an address is found in its own alias expansion, delivery is
+made to the user instead. When a user is listed in the user's own
+~/.\fBforward\fR file, delivery is made to the user's mailbox instead.
+An empty ~/.\fBforward\fR file means do not forward mail.
+
+In order to prevent the mail system from using up unreasonable
+amounts of memory, input records read from \fB:include:\fR or from
+~/.\fBforward\fR files are broken up into chunks of length
+\fBline_length_limit\fR.
+
+While expanding aliases, ~/.\fBforward\fR files, and so on, the
+program attempts to avoid duplicate deliveries. The
+\fBduplicate_filter_limit\fR configuration parameter limits the
+number of remembered recipients.
+.SH "MAIL FORWARDING"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+For the sake of reliability, forwarded mail is re\-submitted as
+a new message, so that each recipient has a separate on\-file
+delivery status record.
+
+In order to stop mail forwarding loops early, the software adds an
+optional
+\fBDelivered\-To:\fR header with the final envelope recipient address. If
+mail arrives for a recipient that is already listed in a
+\fBDelivered\-To:\fR header, the message is bounced.
+.SH "MAILBOX DELIVERY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The default per\-user mailbox is a file in the UNIX mail spool
+directory (\fB/var/mail/\fIuser\fR or \fB/var/spool/mail/\fIuser\fR);
+the location can be specified with the \fBmail_spool_directory\fR
+configuration parameter. Specify a name ending in \fB/\fR for
+\fBqmail\fR\-compatible \fBmaildir\fR delivery.
+
+Alternatively, the per\-user mailbox can be a file in the user's home
+directory with a name specified via the \fBhome_mailbox\fR
+configuration parameter. Specify a relative path name. Specify a name
+ending in \fB/\fR for \fBqmail\fR\-compatible \fBmaildir\fR delivery.
+
+Mailbox delivery can be delegated to an external command specified
+with the \fBmailbox_command_maps\fR and \fBmailbox_command\fR
+configuration parameters. The command
+executes with the privileges of the recipient user (exceptions:
+secondary groups are not enabled; in case of delivery as root,
+the command executes with the privileges of \fBdefault_privs\fR).
+
+Mailbox delivery can be delegated to alternative message transports
+specified in the \fBmaster.cf\fR file.
+The \fBmailbox_transport_maps\fR and \fBmailbox_transport\fR
+configuration parameters specify an optional
+message transport that is to be used for all local recipients,
+regardless of whether they are found in the UNIX passwd database.
+The \fBfallback_transport_maps\fR and
+\fBfallback_transport\fR parameters specify an optional
+message transport
+for recipients that are not found in the aliases(5) or UNIX
+passwd database.
+
+In the case of UNIX\-style mailbox delivery,
+the \fBlocal\fR(8) daemon prepends a "\fBFrom \fIsender time_stamp\fR"
+envelope header to each message, prepends an
+\fBX\-Original\-To:\fR header with the recipient address as given to
+Postfix, prepends an
+optional \fBDelivered\-To:\fR header
+with the final envelope recipient address, prepends a \fBReturn\-Path:\fR
+header with the envelope sender address, prepends a \fB>\fR character
+to lines beginning with "\fBFrom \fR", and appends an empty line.
+The mailbox is locked for exclusive access while delivery is in
+progress. In case of problems, an attempt is made to truncate the
+mailbox to its original length.
+
+In the case of \fBmaildir\fR delivery, the local daemon prepends
+an optional
+\fBDelivered\-To:\fR header with the final envelope recipient address,
+prepends an
+\fBX\-Original\-To:\fR header with the recipient address as given to
+Postfix,
+and prepends a \fBReturn\-Path:\fR header with the envelope sender
+address.
+.SH "EXTERNAL COMMAND DELIVERY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBallow_mail_to_commands\fR configuration parameter restricts
+delivery to external commands. The default setting (\fBalias,
+forward\fR) forbids command destinations in \fB:include:\fR files.
+
+Optionally, the process working directory is changed to the path
+specified with \fBcommand_execution_directory\fR (Postfix 2.2 and
+later). Failure to change directory causes mail to be deferred.
+
+The \fBcommand_execution_directory\fR parameter value is subject
+to interpolation of \fB$user\fR (recipient username),
+\fB$home\fR (recipient home directory), \fB$shell\fR
+(recipient shell), \fB$recipient\fR (complete recipient
+address), \fB$extension\fR (recipient address extension),
+\fB$domain\fR (recipient domain), \fB$local\fR (entire
+recipient address localpart) and \fB$recipient_delimiter.\fR
+The forms \fI${name?value}\fR and \fI${name:value}\fR expand
+conditionally to \fIvalue\fR when \fI$name\fR is (is not)
+defined.  Characters that may have special meaning to the
+shell or file system are replaced by underscores.  The list
+of acceptable characters is specified with the
+\fBexecution_directory_expansion_filter\fR configuration
+parameter.
+
+The command is executed directly where possible. Assistance by the
+shell (\fB/bin/sh\fR on UNIX systems) is used only when the command
+contains shell magic characters, or when the command invokes a shell
+built\-in command.
+
+A limited amount of command output (standard output and standard
+error) is captured for inclusion with non\-delivery status reports.
+A command is forcibly terminated if it does not complete within
+\fBcommand_time_limit\fR seconds.  Command exit status codes are
+expected to follow the conventions defined in <\fBsysexits.h\fR>.
+Exit status 0 means normal successful completion.
+
+Postfix version 2.3 and later support RFC 3463\-style enhanced
+status codes.  If a command terminates with a non\-zero exit
+status, and the command output begins with an enhanced
+status code, this status code takes precedence over the
+non\-zero exit status.
+
+A limited amount of message context is exported via environment
+variables. Characters that may have special meaning to the shell
+are replaced by underscores.  The list of acceptable characters
+is specified with the \fBcommand_expansion_filter\fR configuration
+parameter.
+.IP \fBSHELL\fR
+The recipient user's login shell.
+.IP \fBHOME\fR
+The recipient user's home directory.
+.IP \fBUSER\fR
+The bare recipient name.
+.IP \fBEXTENSION\fR
+The optional recipient address extension.
+.IP \fBDOMAIN\fR
+The recipient address domain part.
+.IP \fBLOGNAME\fR
+The bare recipient name.
+.IP \fBLOCAL\fR
+The entire recipient address localpart (text to the left of the
+rightmost @ character).
+.IP \fBORIGINAL_RECIPIENT\fR
+The entire recipient address, before any address rewriting
+or aliasing (Postfix 2.5 and later).
+.IP \fBRECIPIENT\fR
+The entire recipient address.
+.IP \fBSENDER\fR
+The entire sender address.
+.PP
+Additional remote client information is made available via
+the following environment variables:
+.IP \fBCLIENT_ADDRESS\fR
+Remote client network address. Available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fBCLIENT_HELO\fR
+Remote client EHLO command parameter. Available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fBCLIENT_HOSTNAME\fR
+Remote client hostname. Available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fBCLIENT_PROTOCOL\fR
+Remote client protocol. Available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fBSASL_METHOD\fR
+SASL authentication method specified in the
+remote client AUTH command. Available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fBSASL_SENDER\fR
+SASL sender address specified in the remote client MAIL
+FROM command. Available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fBSASL_USERNAME\fR
+SASL username specified in the remote client AUTH command.
+Available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.PP
+The \fBPATH\fR environment variable is always reset to a
+system\-dependent default path, and environment variables
+whose names are blessed by the \fBexport_environment\fR
+configuration parameter are exported unchanged.
+
+The current working directory is the mail queue directory.
+
+The \fBlocal\fR(8) daemon prepends a "\fBFrom \fIsender time_stamp\fR"
+envelope header to each message, prepends an
+\fBX\-Original\-To:\fR header with the recipient address as given to
+Postfix, prepends an
+optional \fBDelivered\-To:\fR
+header with the final recipient envelope address, prepends a
+\fBReturn\-Path:\fR header with the sender envelope address,
+and appends no empty line.
+.SH "EXTERNAL FILE DELIVERY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The delivery format depends on the destination filename syntax.
+The default is to use UNIX\-style mailbox format.  Specify a name
+ending in \fB/\fR for \fBqmail\fR\-compatible \fBmaildir\fR delivery.
+
+The \fBallow_mail_to_files\fR configuration parameter restricts
+delivery to external files. The default setting (\fBalias,
+forward\fR) forbids file destinations in \fB:include:\fR files.
+
+In the case of UNIX\-style mailbox delivery,
+the \fBlocal\fR(8) daemon prepends a "\fBFrom \fIsender time_stamp\fR"
+envelope header to each message, prepends an
+\fBX\-Original\-To:\fR header with the recipient address as given to
+Postfix, prepends an
+optional \fBDelivered\-To:\fR
+header with the final recipient envelope address, prepends a \fB>\fR
+character to lines beginning with "\fBFrom \fR", and appends an
+empty line.
+The envelope sender address is available in the \fBReturn\-Path:\fR
+header.
+When the destination is a regular file, it is locked for exclusive
+access while delivery is in progress. In case of problems, an attempt
+is made to truncate a regular file to its original length.
+
+In the case of \fBmaildir\fR delivery, the local daemon prepends
+an optional
+\fBDelivered\-To:\fR header with the final envelope recipient address,
+and prepends an
+\fBX\-Original\-To:\fR header with the recipient address as given to
+Postfix.
+The envelope sender address is available in the \fBReturn\-Path:\fR
+header.
+.SH "ADDRESS EXTENSION"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The optional \fBrecipient_delimiter\fR configuration parameter
+specifies how to separate address extensions from local recipient
+names.
+
+For example, with "\fBrecipient_delimiter = +\fR", mail for
+\fIname\fR+\fIfoo\fR is delivered to the alias \fIname\fR+\fIfoo\fR
+or to the alias \fIname\fR, to the destinations listed in
+~\fIname\fR/.\fBforward\fR+\fIfoo\fR or in ~\fIname\fR/.\fBforward\fR,
+to the mailbox owned by the user \fIname\fR, or it is sent back as
+undeliverable.
+.SH "DELIVERY RIGHTS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Deliveries to external files and external commands are made with
+the rights of the receiving user on whose behalf the delivery is made.
+In the absence of a user context, the \fBlocal\fR(8) daemon uses the
+owner rights of the \fB:include:\fR file or alias database.
+When those files are owned by the superuser, delivery is made with
+the rights specified with the \fBdefault_privs\fR configuration
+parameter.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 822 (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced status codes)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+Corrupted message files are marked so that the queue
+manager can move them to the \fBcorrupt\fR queue afterwards.
+
+Depending on the setting of the \fBnotify_classes\fR parameter,
+the postmaster is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent needs a dual personality
+1) to access the private Postfix queue and IPC mechanisms,
+2) to impersonate the recipient and deliver to recipient\-specified
+files or commands. It is therefore security sensitive.
+
+The \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent disallows regular expression
+substitution of $1 etc. in \fBalias_maps\fR, because that
+would open a security hole.
+
+The \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent will silently ignore
+requests to use the \fBproxymap\fR(8) server within
+\fBalias_maps\fR. Instead it will open the table directly.
+Before Postfix version 2.2, the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery
+agent will terminate with a fatal error.
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+For security reasons, the message delivery status of external commands
+or of external files is never checkpointed to file. As a result,
+the program may occasionally deliver more than once to a command or
+external file. Better safe than sorry.
+
+Mutually\-recursive aliases or ~/.\fBforward\fR files are not detected
+early.  The resulting mail forwarding loop is broken by the use of the
+\fBDelivered\-To:\fR message header.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as \fBlocal\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBbiff (yes)\fR"
+Whether or not to use the local biff service.
+.IP "\fBexpand_owner_alias (no)\fR"
+When delivering to an alias "\fIaliasname\fR" that has an
+"owner\-\fIaliasname\fR" companion alias, set the envelope sender
+address to the expansion of the "owner\-\fIaliasname\fR" alias.
+.IP "\fBowner_request_special (yes)\fR"
+Enable special treatment for owner\-\fIlistname\fR entries in the
+\fBaliases\fR(5) file, and don't split owner\-\fIlistname\fR and
+\fIlistname\fR\-request address localparts when the recipient_delimiter
+is set to "\-".
+.IP "\fBsun_mailtool_compatibility (no)\fR"
+Obsolete SUN mailtool compatibility feature.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBfrozen_delivered_to (yes)\fR"
+Update the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent's idea of the Delivered\-To:
+address (see prepend_delivered_header) only once, at the start of
+a delivery attempt; do not update the Delivered\-To: address while
+expanding aliases or .forward files.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBstrict_mailbox_ownership (yes)\fR"
+Defer delivery when a mailbox file is not owned by its recipient.
+.IP "\fBreset_owner_alias (no)\fR"
+Reset the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent's idea of the owner\-alias
+attribute, when delivering mail to a child alias that does not have
+its own owner alias.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBlocal_delivery_status_filter ($default_delivery_status_filter)\fR"
+Optional filter for the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent to change the
+status code or explanatory text of successful or unsuccessful
+deliveries.
+.SH "DELIVERY METHOD CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The precedence of \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery methods from high to low is:
+aliases, .forward files, mailbox_transport_maps,
+mailbox_transport, mailbox_command_maps, mailbox_command,
+home_mailbox, mail_spool_directory, fallback_transport_maps,
+fallback_transport, and luser_relay.
+.IP "\fBalias_maps (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The alias databases that are used for \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery.
+.IP "\fBforward_path (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent search list for finding a .forward
+file with user\-specified delivery methods.
+.IP "\fBmailbox_transport_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with per\-recipient message delivery
+transports to use for \fBlocal\fR(8) mailbox delivery, whether or not the
+recipients are found in the UNIX passwd database.
+.IP "\fBmailbox_transport (empty)\fR"
+Optional message delivery transport that the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery
+agent should use for mailbox delivery to all local recipients,
+whether or not they are found in the UNIX passwd database.
+.IP "\fBmailbox_command_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with per\-recipient external commands to use
+for \fBlocal\fR(8) mailbox delivery.
+.IP "\fBmailbox_command (empty)\fR"
+Optional external command that the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent should
+use for mailbox delivery.
+.IP "\fBhome_mailbox (empty)\fR"
+Optional pathname of a mailbox file relative to a \fBlocal\fR(8) user's
+home directory.
+.IP "\fBmail_spool_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The directory where \fBlocal\fR(8) UNIX\-style mailboxes are kept.
+.IP "\fBfallback_transport_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with per\-recipient message delivery
+transports for recipients that the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent could
+not find in the \fBaliases\fR(5) or UNIX password database.
+.IP "\fBfallback_transport (empty)\fR"
+Optional message delivery transport that the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery
+agent should use for names that are not found in the \fBaliases\fR(5)
+or UNIX password database.
+.IP "\fBluser_relay (empty)\fR"
+Optional catch\-all destination for unknown \fBlocal\fR(8) recipients.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBcommand_execution_directory (empty)\fR"
+The \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent working directory for delivery to
+external command.
+.SH "MAILBOX LOCKING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBdeliver_lock_attempts (20)\fR"
+The maximal number of attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a
+mailbox file or \fBbounce\fR(8) logfile.
+.IP "\fBdeliver_lock_delay (1s)\fR"
+The time between attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a mailbox
+file or \fBbounce\fR(8) logfile.
+.IP "\fBstale_lock_time (500s)\fR"
+The time after which a stale exclusive mailbox lockfile is removed.
+.IP "\fBmailbox_delivery_lock (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+How to lock a UNIX\-style \fBlocal\fR(8) mailbox before attempting delivery.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBcommand_time_limit (1000s)\fR"
+Time limit for delivery to external commands.
+.IP "\fBduplicate_filter_limit (1000)\fR"
+The maximal number of addresses remembered by the address
+duplicate filter for \fBaliases\fR(5) or \fBvirtual\fR(5) alias expansion, or
+for \fBshowq\fR(8) queue displays.
+.IP "\fBmailbox_size_limit (51200000)\fR"
+The maximal size of any \fBlocal\fR(8) individual mailbox or maildir
+file, or zero (no limit).
+.PP
+Implemented in the qmgr(8) daemon:
+.IP "\fBlocal_destination_concurrency_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of parallel deliveries via the local mail
+delivery transport to the same recipient (when
+"local_destination_recipient_limit = 1") or the maximal number of
+parallel deliveries to the same local domain (when
+"local_destination_recipient_limit > 1").
+.IP "\fBlocal_destination_recipient_limit (1)\fR"
+The maximal number of recipients per message delivery via the
+local mail delivery transport.
+.SH "SECURITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBallow_mail_to_commands (alias, forward)\fR"
+Restrict \fBlocal\fR(8) mail delivery to external commands.
+.IP "\fBallow_mail_to_files (alias, forward)\fR"
+Restrict \fBlocal\fR(8) mail delivery to external files.
+.IP "\fBcommand_expansion_filter (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+Restrict the characters that the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent allows in
+$name expansions of $mailbox_command and $command_execution_directory.
+.IP "\fBdefault_privs (nobody)\fR"
+The default rights used by the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent for delivery
+to external file or command.
+.IP "\fBforward_expansion_filter (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+Restrict the characters that the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent allows in
+$name expansions of $forward_path.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBexecution_directory_expansion_filter (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+Restrict the characters that the \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery agent allows
+in $name expansions of $command_execution_directory.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBstrict_mailbox_ownership (yes)\fR"
+Defer delivery when a mailbox file is not owned by its recipient.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBexport_environment (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The list of environment variables that a Postfix process will export
+to non\-Postfix processes.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBlocal_command_shell (empty)\fR"
+Optional shell program for \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery to non\-Postfix command.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprepend_delivered_header (command, file, forward)\fR"
+The message delivery contexts where the Postfix \fBlocal\fR(8) delivery
+agent prepends a Delivered\-To:  message header with the address
+that the mail was delivered to.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBpropagate_unmatched_extensions (canonical, virtual)\fR"
+What address lookup tables copy an address extension from the lookup
+key to the lookup result.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBrecipient_delimiter (empty)\fR"
+The set of characters that can separate a user name from its
+extension (example: user+foo), or a .forward file name from its
+extension (example: .forward+foo).
+.IP "\fBrequire_home_directory (no)\fR"
+Require that a \fBlocal\fR(8) recipient's home directory exists
+before mail delivery is attempted.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_original_recipient (yes)\fR"
+Enable support for the original recipient address after an
+address is rewritten to a different address (for example with
+aliasing or with canonical mapping).
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.SH "FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+The following are examples; details differ between systems.
+$HOME/.forward, per\-user aliasing
+/etc/aliases, system\-wide alias database
+/var/spool/mail, system mailboxes
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+bounce(8), delivery status reports
+newaliases(1), create/update alias database
+postalias(1), create/update alias database
+aliases(5), format of alias database
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBDelivered\-To:\fR message header appears in the \fBqmail\fR
+system by Daniel Bernstein.
+
+The \fImaildir\fR structure appears in the \fBqmail\fR system
+by Daniel Bernstein.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/master.8 b/man/man8/master.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4517fa0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/master.8
@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+.TH MASTER 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+master
+\-
+Postfix master process
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBmaster\fR [\fB\-Dditvw\fR] [\fB\-c \fIconfig_dir\fR] [\fB\-e \fIexit_time\fR]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBmaster\fR(8) daemon is the resident process that runs Postfix
+daemons on demand: daemons to send or receive messages via the
+network, daemons to deliver mail locally, etc.  These daemons are
+created on demand up to a configurable maximum number per service.
+
+Postfix daemons terminate voluntarily, either after being idle for
+a configurable amount of time, or after having serviced a
+configurable number of requests. Exceptions to this rule are the
+resident queue manager, address verification server, and the TLS
+session cache and pseudo\-random number server.
+
+The behavior of the \fBmaster\fR(8) daemon is controlled by the
+\fBmaster.cf\fR configuration file, as described in \fBmaster\fR(5).
+
+Options:
+.IP "\fB\-c \fIconfig_dir\fR"
+Read the \fBmain.cf\fR and \fBmaster.cf\fR configuration files in
+the named directory instead of the default configuration directory.
+This also overrides the configuration files for other Postfix
+daemon processes.
+.IP \fB\-D\fR
+After initialization, run a debugger on the master process. The
+debugging command is specified with the \fBdebugger_command\fR in
+the \fBmain.cf\fR global configuration file.
+.IP \fB\-d\fR
+Do not redirect stdin, stdout or stderr to /dev/null, and
+do not discard the controlling terminal. This must be used
+for debugging only.
+.IP "\fB\-e \fIexit_time\fR"
+Terminate the master process after \fIexit_time\fR seconds. Child
+processes terminate at their convenience.
+.IP \fB\-i\fR
+Enable \fBinit\fR mode: do not become a session or process
+group leader; and similar to \fB\-s\fR, do not redirect stdout
+to /dev/null, so that "maillog_file = /dev/stdout" works.
+This mode is allowed only if the process ID equals 1.
+.sp
+This feature is available in Postfix 3.3 and later.
+.IP \fB\-s\fR
+Do not redirect stdout to /dev/null, so that "maillog_file
+= /dev/stdout" works.
+.sp
+This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.
+.IP \fB\-t\fR
+Test mode. Return a zero exit status when the \fBmaster.pid\fR lock
+file does not exist or when that file is not locked.  This is evidence
+that the \fBmaster\fR(8) daemon is not running.
+.IP \fB\-v\fR
+Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes. This option
+is passed on to child processes. Multiple \fB\-v\fR options
+make the software increasingly verbose.
+.IP \fB\-w\fR
+Wait in a dummy foreground process, while the real master
+daemon initializes in a background process.  The dummy
+foreground process returns a zero exit status only if the
+master daemon initialization is successful, and if it
+completes in a reasonable amount of time.
+.sp
+This feature is available in Postfix 2.10 and later.
+.PP
+Signals:
+.IP \fBSIGHUP\fR
+Upon receipt of a \fBHUP\fR signal (e.g., after "\fBpostfix reload\fR"),
+the master process re\-reads its configuration files. If a service has
+been removed from the \fBmaster.cf\fR file, its running processes
+are terminated immediately.
+Otherwise, running processes are allowed to terminate as soon
+as is convenient, so that changes in configuration settings
+affect only new service requests.
+.IP \fBSIGTERM\fR
+Upon receipt of a \fBTERM\fR signal (e.g., after "\fBpostfix abort\fR"),
+the master process passes the signal on to its child processes and
+terminates.
+This is useful for an emergency shutdown. Normally one would
+terminate only the master ("\fBpostfix stop\fR") and allow running
+processes to finish what they are doing.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems are reported to \fBsyslogd\fR(8) or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+The exit status
+is non\-zero in case of problems, including problems while
+initializing as a master daemon process in the background.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP \fBMAIL_DEBUG\fR
+After initialization, start a debugger as specified with the
+\fBdebugger_command\fR configuration parameter in the \fBmain.cf\fR
+configuration file.
+.IP \fBMAIL_CONFIG\fR
+Directory with Postfix configuration files.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Unlike most Postfix daemon processes, the \fBmaster\fR(8) server does
+not automatically pick up changes to \fBmain.cf\fR. Changes
+to \fBmaster.cf\fR are never picked up automatically.
+Use the "\fBpostfix reload\fR" command after a configuration change.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBdefault_process_limit (100)\fR"
+The default maximal number of Postfix child processes that provide
+a given service.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBservice_throttle_time (60s)\fR"
+How long the Postfix \fBmaster\fR(8) waits before forking a server that
+appears to be malfunctioning.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.6 and later:
+.IP "\fBmaster_service_disable (empty)\fR"
+Selectively disable \fBmaster\fR(8) listener ports by service type
+or by service name and type.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The directory with Postfix support programs and daemon programs.
+.IP "\fBdebugger_command (empty)\fR"
+The external command to execute when a Postfix daemon program is
+invoked with the \-D option.
+.IP "\fBinet_interfaces (all)\fR"
+The network interface addresses that this mail system receives
+mail on.
+.IP "\fBinet_protocols (all)\fR"
+The Internet protocols Postfix will attempt to use when making
+or accepting connections.
+.IP "\fBimport_environment (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The list of environment parameters that a privileged Postfix
+process will import from a non\-Postfix parent process, or name=value
+environment overrides.
+.IP "\fBmail_owner (postfix)\fR"
+The UNIX system account that owns the Postfix queue and most Postfix
+daemon processes.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+To expand the directory names below into their actual values,
+use the command "\fBpostconf config_directory\fR" etc.
+.na
+.nf
+
+$config_directory/main.cf, global configuration file.
+$config_directory/master.cf, master server configuration file.
+$queue_directory/pid/master.pid, master lock file.
+$data_directory/master.lock, master lock file.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+verify(8), address verification
+master(5), master.cf configuration file syntax
+postconf(5), main.cf configuration file syntax
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/oqmgr.8 b/man/man8/oqmgr.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61b4299
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/oqmgr.8
@@ -0,0 +1,425 @@
+.TH OQMGR 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+oqmgr
+\-
+old Postfix queue manager
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBoqmgr\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBoqmgr\fR(8) daemon awaits the arrival of incoming mail
+and arranges for its delivery via Postfix delivery processes.
+The actual mail routing strategy is delegated to the
+\fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR(8) daemon.
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+Mail addressed to the local \fBdouble\-bounce\fR address is
+logged and discarded.  This stops potential loops caused by
+undeliverable bounce notifications.
+.SH "MAIL QUEUES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBoqmgr\fR(8) daemon maintains the following queues:
+.IP \fBincoming\fR
+Inbound mail from the network, or mail picked up by the
+local \fBpickup\fR(8) agent from the \fBmaildrop\fR directory.
+.IP \fBactive\fR
+Messages that the queue manager has opened for delivery. Only
+a limited number of messages is allowed to enter the \fBactive\fR
+queue (leaky bucket strategy, for a fixed delivery rate).
+.IP \fBdeferred\fR
+Mail that could not be delivered upon the first attempt. The queue
+manager implements exponential backoff by doubling the time between
+delivery attempts.
+.IP \fBcorrupt\fR
+Unreadable or damaged queue files are moved here for inspection.
+.IP \fBhold\fR
+Messages that are kept "on hold" are kept here until someone
+sets them free.
+.SH "DELIVERY STATUS REPORTS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBoqmgr\fR(8) daemon keeps an eye on per\-message delivery status
+reports in the following directories. Each status report file has
+the same name as the corresponding message file:
+.IP \fBbounce\fR
+Per\-recipient status information about why mail is bounced.
+These files are maintained by the \fBbounce\fR(8) daemon.
+.IP \fBdefer\fR
+Per\-recipient status information about why mail is delayed.
+These files are maintained by the \fBdefer\fR(8) daemon.
+.IP \fBtrace\fR
+Per\-recipient status information as requested with the
+Postfix "\fBsendmail \-v\fR" or "\fBsendmail \-bv\fR" command.
+These files are maintained by the \fBtrace\fR(8) daemon.
+.PP
+The \fBoqmgr\fR(8) daemon is responsible for asking the
+\fBbounce\fR(8), \fBdefer\fR(8) or \fBtrace\fR(8) daemons to
+send delivery reports.
+.SH "STRATEGIES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The queue manager implements a variety of strategies for
+either opening queue files (input) or for message delivery (output).
+.IP "\fBleaky bucket\fR"
+This strategy limits the number of messages in the \fBactive\fR queue
+and prevents the queue manager from running out of memory under
+heavy load.
+.IP \fBfairness\fR
+When the \fBactive\fR queue has room, the queue manager takes one
+message from the \fBincoming\fR queue and one from the \fBdeferred\fR
+queue. This prevents a large mail backlog from blocking the delivery
+of new mail.
+.IP "\fBslow start\fR"
+This strategy eliminates "thundering herd" problems by slowly
+adjusting the number of parallel deliveries to the same destination.
+.IP "\fBround robin\fR"
+The queue manager sorts delivery requests by destination.
+Round\-robin selection prevents one destination from dominating
+deliveries to other destinations.
+.IP "\fBexponential backoff\fR"
+Mail that cannot be delivered upon the first attempt is deferred.
+The time interval between delivery attempts is doubled after each
+attempt.
+.IP "\fBdestination status cache\fR"
+The queue manager avoids unnecessary delivery attempts by
+maintaining a short\-term, in\-memory list of unreachable destinations.
+.SH "TRIGGERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+On an idle system, the queue manager waits for the arrival of
+trigger events, or it waits for a timer to go off. A trigger
+is a one\-byte message.
+Depending on the message received, the queue manager performs
+one of the following actions (the message is followed by the
+symbolic constant used internally by the software):
+.IP "\fBD (QMGR_REQ_SCAN_DEFERRED)\fR"
+Start a deferred queue scan.  If a deferred queue scan is already
+in progress, that scan will be restarted as soon as it finishes.
+.IP "\fBI (QMGR_REQ_SCAN_INCOMING)\fR"
+Start an incoming queue scan. If an incoming queue scan is already
+in progress, that scan will be restarted as soon as it finishes.
+.IP "\fBA (QMGR_REQ_SCAN_ALL)\fR"
+Ignore deferred queue file time stamps. The request affects
+the next deferred queue scan.
+.IP "\fBF (QMGR_REQ_FLUSH_DEAD)\fR"
+Purge all information about dead transports and destinations.
+.IP "\fBW (TRIGGER_REQ_WAKEUP)\fR"
+Wakeup call, This is used by the master server to instantiate
+servers that should not go away forever. The action is to start
+an incoming queue scan.
+.PP
+The \fBoqmgr\fR(8) daemon reads an entire buffer worth of triggers.
+Multiple identical trigger requests are collapsed into one, and
+trigger requests are sorted so that \fBA\fR and \fBF\fR precede
+\fBD\fR and \fBI\fR. Thus, in order to force a deferred queue run,
+one would request \fBA F D\fR; in order to notify the queue manager
+of the arrival of new mail one would request \fBI\fR.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced status codes)
+RFC 3464 (Delivery status notifications)
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBoqmgr\fR(8) daemon is not security sensitive. It reads
+single\-character messages from untrusted local users, and thus may
+be susceptible to denial of service attacks. The \fBoqmgr\fR(8) daemon
+does not talk to the outside world, and it can be run at fixed low
+privilege in a chrooted environment.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to the \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8) daemon.
+Corrupted message files are saved to the \fBcorrupt\fR queue
+for further inspection.
+
+Depending on the setting of the \fBnotify_classes\fR parameter,
+the postmaster is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+A single queue manager process has to compete for disk access with
+multiple front\-end processes such as \fBcleanup\fR(8). A sudden burst of
+inbound mail can negatively impact outbound delivery rates.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are not picked up automatically,
+as \fBoqmgr\fR(8)
+is a persistent process. Use the command "\fBpostfix reload\fR" after
+a configuration change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+
+In the text below, \fItransport\fR is the first field in a
+\fBmaster.cf\fR entry.
+.SH "COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Available before Postfix version 2.5:
+.IP "\fBallow_min_user (no)\fR"
+Allow a sender or recipient address to have `\-' as the first
+character.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix version 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBdefault_filter_nexthop (empty)\fR"
+When a content_filter or FILTER request specifies no explicit
+next\-hop destination, use $default_filter_nexthop instead; when
+that value is empty, use the domain in the recipient address.
+.SH "ACTIVE QUEUE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBqmgr_clog_warn_time (300s)\fR"
+The minimal delay between warnings that a specific destination is
+clogging up the Postfix active queue.
+.IP "\fBqmgr_message_active_limit (20000)\fR"
+The maximal number of messages in the active queue.
+.IP "\fBqmgr_message_recipient_limit (20000)\fR"
+The maximal number of recipients held in memory by the Postfix
+queue manager, and the maximal size of the short\-term,
+in\-memory "dead" destination status cache.
+.SH "DELIVERY CONCURRENCY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBqmgr_fudge_factor (100)\fR"
+Obsolete feature: the percentage of delivery resources that a busy
+mail system will use up for delivery of a large mailing  list
+message.
+.IP "\fBinitial_destination_concurrency (5)\fR"
+The initial per\-destination concurrency level for parallel delivery
+to the same destination.
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_concurrency_limit (20)\fR"
+The default maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same
+destination.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_limit ($default_destination_concurrency_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_limit parameter value, where
+\fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBtransport_initial_destination_concurrency ($initial_destination_concurrency)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the initial_destination_concurrency
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit (1)\fR"
+How many pseudo\-cohorts must suffer connection or handshake
+failure before a specific destination is considered unavailable
+(and further delivery is suspended).
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit ($default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit parameter value,
+where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback (1)\fR"
+The per\-destination amount of delivery concurrency negative
+feedback, after a delivery completes with a connection or handshake
+failure.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback ($default_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback parameter value,
+where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback (1)\fR"
+The per\-destination amount of delivery concurrency positive
+feedback, after a delivery completes without connection or handshake
+failure.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback ($default_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback parameter value,
+where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.IP "\fBdestination_concurrency_feedback_debug (no)\fR"
+Make the queue manager's feedback algorithm verbose for performance
+analysis purposes.
+.SH "RECIPIENT SCHEDULING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_recipient_limit (50)\fR"
+The default maximal number of recipients per message delivery.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_recipient_limit ($default_destination_recipient_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_recipient_limit parameter value, where
+\fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.SH "OTHER RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBminimal_backoff_time (300s)\fR"
+The minimal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message;
+prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
+.IP "\fBmaximal_backoff_time (4000s)\fR"
+The maximal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message.
+.IP "\fBmaximal_queue_lifetime (5d)\fR"
+Consider a message as undeliverable, when delivery fails with a
+temporary error, and the time in the queue has reached the
+maximal_queue_lifetime limit.
+.IP "\fBqueue_run_delay (300s)\fR"
+The time between deferred queue scans by the queue manager;
+prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
+.IP "\fBtransport_retry_time (60s)\fR"
+The time between attempts by the Postfix queue manager to contact
+a malfunctioning message delivery transport.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBbounce_queue_lifetime (5d)\fR"
+Consider a bounce message as undeliverable, when delivery fails
+with a temporary error, and the time in the queue has reached the
+bounce_queue_lifetime limit.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_rate_delay (0s)\fR"
+The default amount of delay that is inserted between individual
+message deliveries to the same destination and over the same message
+delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_rate_delay ($default_destination_rate_delay)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_destination_rate_delay
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBdefault_transport_rate_delay (0s)\fR"
+The default amount of delay that is inserted between individual
+message deliveries over the same message delivery transport,
+regardless of destination.
+.IP "\fBtransport_transport_rate_delay ($default_transport_rate_delay)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_transport_rate_delay
+parameter value, where the initial \fItransport\fR in the parameter
+name is the master.cf name of the message delivery transport.
+.SH "SAFETY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBqmgr_daemon_timeout (1000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix queue manager process may take to handle
+a request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBqmgr_ipc_timeout (60s)\fR"
+The time limit for the queue manager to send or receive information
+over an internal communication channel.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_pending_request_limit (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A safety limit that prevents address verification requests from
+overwhelming the Postfix queue.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdefer_transports (empty)\fR"
+The names of message delivery transports that should not deliver mail
+unless someone issues "\fBsendmail \-q\fR" or equivalent.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBhelpful_warnings (yes)\fR"
+Log warnings about problematic configuration settings, and provide
+helpful suggestions.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBconfirm_delay_cleared (no)\fR"
+After sending a "your message is delayed" notification, inform
+the sender when the delay clears up.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.SH "FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+/var/spool/postfix/incoming, incoming queue
+/var/spool/postfix/active, active queue
+/var/spool/postfix/deferred, deferred queue
+/var/spool/postfix/bounce, non\-delivery status
+/var/spool/postfix/defer, non\-delivery status
+/var/spool/postfix/trace, delivery status
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+trivial\-rewrite(8), address routing
+bounce(8), delivery status reports
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+QSHAPE_README, Postfix queue analysis
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/pickup.8 b/man/man8/pickup.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd5d922
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/pickup.8
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+.TH PICKUP 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+pickup
+\-
+Postfix local mail pickup
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBpickup\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBpickup\fR(8) daemon waits for hints that new mail has been
+dropped into the \fBmaildrop\fR directory, and feeds it into the
+\fBcleanup\fR(8) daemon.
+Ill\-formatted files are deleted without notifying the originator.
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+None. The \fBpickup\fR(8) daemon does not interact with
+the outside world.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBpickup\fR(8) daemon is moderately security sensitive. It runs
+with fixed low privilege and can run in a chrooted environment.
+However, the program reads files from potentially hostile users.
+The \fBpickup\fR(8) daemon opens no files for writing, is careful about
+what files it opens for reading, and does not actually touch any data
+that is sent to its public service endpoint.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBpickup\fR(8) daemon copies mail from file to the \fBcleanup\fR(8)
+daemon.  It could avoid message copying overhead by sending a file
+descriptor instead of file data, but then the already complex
+\fBcleanup\fR(8) daemon would have to deal with unfiltered user data.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+As the \fBpickup\fR(8) daemon is a relatively long\-running process, up
+to an hour may pass before a \fBmain.cf\fR change takes effect.
+Use the command "\fBpostfix reload\fR" command to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBcontent_filter (empty)\fR"
+After the message is queued, send the entire message to the
+specified \fItransport:destination\fR.
+.IP "\fBreceive_override_options (empty)\fR"
+Enable or disable recipient validation, built\-in content
+filtering, or address mapping.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBline_length_limit (2048)\fR"
+Upon input, long lines are chopped up into pieces of at most
+this length; upon delivery, long lines are reconstructed.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+cleanup(8), message canonicalization
+sendmail(1), Sendmail\-compatible interface
+postdrop(1), mail posting agent
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/pipe.8 b/man/man8/pipe.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..777fd95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/pipe.8
@@ -0,0 +1,484 @@
+.TH PIPE 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+pipe
+\-
+Postfix delivery to external command
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBpipe\fR [generic Postfix daemon options] command_attributes...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBpipe\fR(8) daemon processes requests from the Postfix queue
+manager to deliver messages to external commands.
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+Message attributes such as sender address, recipient address and
+next\-hop host name can be specified as command\-line macros that are
+expanded before the external command is executed.
+
+The \fBpipe\fR(8) daemon updates queue files and marks recipients
+as finished, or it informs the queue manager that delivery should
+be tried again at a later time. Delivery status reports are sent
+to the \fBbounce\fR(8), \fBdefer\fR(8) or \fBtrace\fR(8) daemon as
+appropriate.
+.SH "SINGLE-RECIPIENT DELIVERY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Some destinations cannot handle more than one recipient per
+delivery request. Examples are pagers or fax machines.
+In addition, multi\-recipient delivery is undesirable when
+prepending a \fBDelivered\-to:\fR or \fBX\-Original\-To:\fR
+message header.
+
+To prevent Postfix from sending multiple recipients per delivery
+request, specify
+.sp
+.nf
+    \fItransport\fB_destination_recipient_limit = 1\fR
+.fi
+
+in the Postfix \fBmain.cf\fR file, where \fItransport\fR
+is the name in the first column of the Postfix \fBmaster.cf\fR
+entry for the pipe\-based delivery transport.
+.SH "COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The external command attributes are given in the \fBmaster.cf\fR
+file at the end of a service definition.  The syntax is as follows:
+.IP "\fBchroot=\fIpathname\fR (optional)"
+Change the process root directory and working directory to
+the named directory. This happens before switching to the
+privileges specified with the \fBuser\fR attribute, and
+before executing the optional \fBdirectory=\fIpathname\fR
+directive. Delivery is deferred in case of failure.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.3.
+.IP "\fBdirectory=\fIpathname\fR (optional)"
+Change to the named directory before executing the external command.
+The directory must be accessible for the user specified with the
+\fBuser\fR attribute (see below).
+The default working directory is \fB$queue_directory\fR.
+Delivery is deferred in case of failure.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP "\fBeol=\fIstring\fR (optional, default: \fB\en\fR)"
+The output record delimiter. Typically one would use either
+\fB\er\en\fR or \fB\en\fR. The usual C\-style backslash escape
+sequences are recognized: \fB\ea \eb \ef \en \er \et \ev
+\e\fIddd\fR (up to three octal digits) and \fB\e\e\fR.
+.IP "\fBflags=BDFORXhqu.>\fR (optional)"
+Optional message processing flags. By default, a message is
+copied unchanged.
+.RS
+.IP \fBB\fR
+Append a blank line at the end of each message. This is required
+by some mail user agents that recognize "\fBFrom \fR" lines only
+when preceded by a blank line.
+.IP \fBD\fR
+Prepend a "\fBDelivered\-To: \fIrecipient\fR" message header with the
+envelope recipient address. Note: for this to work, the
+\fItransport\fB_destination_recipient_limit\fR must be 1
+(see SINGLE\-RECIPIENT DELIVERY above for details).
+.sp
+The \fBD\fR flag also enforces loop detection (Postfix 2.5 and later):
+if a message already contains a \fBDelivered\-To:\fR header
+with the same recipient address, then the message is
+returned as undeliverable. The address comparison is case
+insensitive.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.0.
+.IP \fBF\fR
+Prepend a "\fBFrom \fIsender time_stamp\fR" envelope header to
+the message content.
+This is expected by, for example, \fBUUCP\fR software.
+.IP \fBO\fR
+Prepend an "\fBX\-Original\-To: \fIrecipient\fR" message header
+with the recipient address as given to Postfix. Note: for this to
+work, the \fItransport\fB_destination_recipient_limit\fR must be 1
+(see SINGLE\-RECIPIENT DELIVERY above for details).
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.0.
+.IP \fBR\fR
+Prepend a \fBReturn\-Path:\fR message header with the envelope sender
+address.
+.IP \fBX\fR
+Indicate that the external command performs final delivery.
+This flag affects the status reported in "success" DSN
+(delivery status notification) messages, and changes it
+from "relayed" into "delivered".
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.5.
+.IP \fBh\fR
+Fold the command\-line \fB$original_recipient\fR and
+\fB$recipient\fR address domain part
+(text to the right of the right\-most \fB@\fR character) to
+lower case; fold the entire command\-line \fB$domain\fR and
+\fB$nexthop\fR host or domain information to lower case.
+This is recommended for delivery via \fBUUCP\fR.
+.IP \fBq\fR
+Quote white space and other special characters in the command\-line
+\fB$sender\fR, \fB$original_recipient\fR and \fB$recipient\fR
+address localparts (text to the
+left of the right\-most \fB@\fR character), according to an 8\-bit
+transparent version of RFC 822.
+This is recommended for delivery via \fBUUCP\fR or \fBBSMTP\fR.
+.sp
+The result is compatible with the address parsing of command\-line
+recipients by the Postfix \fBsendmail\fR(1) mail submission command.
+.sp
+The \fBq\fR flag affects only entire addresses, not the partial
+address information from the \fB$user\fR, \fB$extension\fR or
+\fB$mailbox\fR command\-line macros.
+.IP \fBu\fR
+Fold the command\-line \fB$original_recipient\fR and
+\fB$recipient\fR address localpart (text to
+the left of the right\-most \fB@\fR character) to lower case.
+This is recommended for delivery via \fBUUCP\fR.
+.IP \fB.\fR
+Prepend "\fB.\fR" to lines starting with "\fB.\fR". This is needed
+by, for example, \fBBSMTP\fR software.
+.IP \fB>\fR
+Prepend "\fB>\fR" to lines starting with "\fBFrom \fR". This is expected
+by, for example, \fBUUCP\fR software.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBnull_sender\fR=\fIreplacement\fR (default: MAILER\-DAEMON)"
+Replace the null sender address (typically used for delivery
+status notifications) with the specified text
+when expanding the \fB$sender\fR command\-line macro, and
+when generating a From_ or Return\-Path: message header.
+
+If the null sender replacement text is a non\-empty string
+then it is affected by the \fBq\fR flag for address quoting
+in command\-line arguments.
+
+The null sender replacement text may be empty; this form
+is recommended for content filters that feed mail back into
+Postfix. The empty sender address is not affected by the
+\fBq\fR flag for address quoting in command\-line arguments.
+.sp
+Caution: a null sender address is easily mis\-parsed by
+naive software. For example, when the \fBpipe\fR(8) daemon
+executes a command such as:
+.sp
+.nf
+    \fIWrong\fR: command \-f$sender \-\- $recipient
+.fi
+.IP
+the command will mis\-parse the \-f option value when the
+sender address is a null string.  For correct parsing,
+specify \fB$sender\fR as an argument by itself:
+.sp
+.nf
+    \fIRight\fR: command \-f $sender \-\- $recipient
+.fi
+.IP
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.3.
+.IP "\fBsize\fR=\fIsize_limit\fR (optional)"
+Don't deliver messages that exceed this size limit (in
+bytes); return them to the sender instead.
+.IP "\fBuser\fR=\fIusername\fR (required)"
+.IP "\fBuser\fR=\fIusername\fR:\fIgroupname\fR"
+Execute the external command with the user ID and group ID of the
+specified \fIusername\fR.  The software refuses to execute
+commands with root privileges, or with the privileges of the
+mail system owner. If \fIgroupname\fR is specified, the
+corresponding group ID is used instead of the group ID of
+\fIusername\fR.
+.IP "\fBargv\fR=\fIcommand\fR... (required)"
+The command to be executed. This must be specified as the
+last command attribute.
+The command is executed directly, i.e. without interpretation of
+shell meta characters by a shell command interpreter.
+.sp
+Specify "{" and "}" around command arguments that contain
+whitespace (Postfix 3.0 and later). Whitespace
+after the opening "{" and before the closing "}" is ignored.
+.sp
+In the command argument vector, the following macros are recognized
+and replaced with corresponding information from the Postfix queue
+manager delivery request.
+.sp
+In addition to the form ${\fIname\fR}, the forms $\fIname\fR and
+the deprecated form $(\fIname\fR) are also recognized.
+Specify \fB$$\fR where a single \fB$\fR is wanted.
+.RS
+.IP \fB${client_address}\fR
+This macro expands to the remote client network address.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fB${client_helo}\fR
+This macro expands to the remote client HELO command parameter.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fB${client_hostname}\fR
+This macro expands to the remote client hostname.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fB${client_port}\fR
+This macro expands to the remote client TCP port number.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.5.
+.IP \fB${client_protocol}\fR
+This macro expands to the remote client protocol.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fB${domain}\fR
+This macro expands to the domain portion of the recipient
+address.  For example, with an address \fIuser+foo@domain\fR
+the domain is \fIdomain\fR.
+.sp
+This information is modified by the \fBh\fR flag for case folding.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.5.
+.IP \fB${extension}\fR
+This macro expands to the extension part of a recipient address.
+For example, with an address \fIuser+foo@domain\fR the extension is
+\fIfoo\fR.
+.sp
+A command\-line argument that contains \fB${extension}\fR expands
+into as many command\-line arguments as there are recipients.
+.sp
+This information is modified by the \fBu\fR flag for case folding.
+.IP \fB${mailbox}\fR
+This macro expands to the complete local part of a recipient address.
+For example, with an address \fIuser+foo@domain\fR the mailbox is
+\fIuser+foo\fR.
+.sp
+A command\-line argument that contains \fB${mailbox}\fR
+expands to as many command\-line arguments as there are recipients.
+.sp
+This information is modified by the \fBu\fR flag for case folding.
+.IP \fB${nexthop}\fR
+This macro expands to the next\-hop hostname.
+.sp
+This information is modified by the \fBh\fR flag for case folding.
+.IP \fB${original_recipient}\fR
+This macro expands to the complete recipient address before any
+address rewriting or aliasing.
+.sp
+A command\-line argument that contains
+\fB${original_recipient}\fR expands to as many
+command\-line arguments as there are recipients.
+.sp
+This information is modified by the \fBhqu\fR flags for quoting
+and case folding.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.5.
+.IP \fB${queue_id}\fR
+This macro expands to the queue id.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.11.
+.IP \fB${recipient}\fR
+This macro expands to the complete recipient address.
+.sp
+A command\-line argument that contains \fB${recipient}\fR
+expands to as many command\-line arguments as there are recipients.
+.sp
+This information is modified by the \fBhqu\fR flags for quoting
+and case folding.
+.IP \fB${sasl_method}\fR
+This macro expands to the name of the SASL authentication
+mechanism in the AUTH command when the Postfix SMTP server
+received the message.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fB${sasl_sender}\fR
+This macro expands to the SASL sender name (i.e. the original
+submitter as per RFC 4954) in the MAIL FROM command when
+the Postfix SMTP server received the message.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fB${sasl_username}\fR
+This macro expands to the SASL user name in the AUTH command
+when the Postfix SMTP server received the message.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 2.2.
+.IP \fB${sender}\fR
+This macro expands to the envelope sender address. By default,
+the null sender address expands to MAILER\-DAEMON; this can
+be changed with the \fBnull_sender\fR attribute, as described
+above.
+.sp
+This information is modified by the \fBq\fR flag for quoting.
+.IP \fB${size}\fR
+This macro expands to Postfix's idea of the message size, which
+is an approximation of the size of the message as delivered.
+.IP \fB${user}\fR
+This macro expands to the username part of a recipient address.
+For example, with an address \fIuser+foo@domain\fR the username
+part is \fIuser\fR.
+.sp
+A command\-line argument that contains \fB${user}\fR expands
+into as many command\-line arguments as there are recipients.
+.sp
+This information is modified by the \fBu\fR flag for case folding.
+.RE
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced status codes)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Command exit status codes are expected to
+follow the conventions defined in <\fBsysexits.h\fR>.
+Exit status 0 means normal successful completion.
+
+In the case of a non\-zero exit status, a limited amount of
+command output is logged, and reported in a delivery status
+notification.  When the output begins with a 4.X.X or 5.X.X
+enhanced status code, the status code takes precedence over
+the non\-zero exit status (Postfix version 2.3 and later).
+
+After successful delivery (zero exit status) a limited
+amount of command output is logged, and reported in "success"
+delivery status notifications (Postfix 3.0 and later).
+This command output is not examined for the presence of an
+enhanced status code.
+
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+Corrupted message files are marked so that the queue manager
+can move them to the \fBcorrupt\fR queue for further inspection.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.fi
+.ad
+This program needs a dual personality 1) to access the private
+Postfix queue and IPC mechanisms, and 2) to execute external
+commands as the specified user. It is therefore security sensitive.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically as \fBpipe\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+In the text below, \fItransport\fR is the first field in a
+\fBmaster.cf\fR entry.
+.IP "\fBtransport_time_limit ($command_time_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the command_time_limit parameter
+value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message
+delivery transport.
+.PP
+Implemented in the qmgr(8) daemon:
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_limit ($default_destination_concurrency_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_limit parameter value, where
+\fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_recipient_limit ($default_destination_recipient_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_recipient_limit parameter value, where
+\fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBexport_environment (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The list of environment variables that a Postfix process will export
+to non\-Postfix processes.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmail_owner (postfix)\fR"
+The UNIX system account that owns the Postfix queue and most Postfix
+daemon processes.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBrecipient_delimiter (empty)\fR"
+The set of characters that can separate a user name from its
+extension (example: user+foo), or a .forward file name from its
+extension (example: .forward+foo).
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBpipe_delivery_status_filter ($default_delivery_status_filter)\fR"
+Optional filter for the \fBpipe\fR(8) delivery agent to change the
+delivery status code or explanatory text of successful or unsuccessful
+deliveries.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_original_recipient (yes)\fR"
+Enable support for the original recipient address after an
+address is rewritten to a different address (for example with
+aliasing or with canonical mapping).
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+bounce(8), delivery status reports
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/postlogd.8 b/man/man8/postlogd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19112f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/postlogd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+.TH POSTLOGD 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+postlogd
+\-
+Postfix internal log server
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBpostlogd\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+This program logs events on behalf of Postfix programs
+when the maillog configuration parameter specifies a non\-empty
+value.
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+Non\-daemon Postfix programs don't know that they should log
+to the internal logging service before they have processed
+command\-line options and main.cf parameters. These programs
+still log earlier events to the syslog service.
+
+If Postfix is down, the non\-daemon programs \fBpostfix\fR(1),
+\fBpostsuper\fR(1), \fBpostmulti\fR(1), and \fBpostlog\fR(1),
+will log directly to \fB$maillog_file\fR. These programs
+expect to run with root privileges, for example during
+Postfix start\-up, reload, or shutdown.
+
+Other non\-daemon Postfix programs will never write directly to
+\fB$maillog_file\fR (also, logging to stdout would interfere
+with the operation of some of these programs). These programs
+can log to \fBpostlogd\fR(8) if they are run by the super\-user,
+or if their executable file has set\-gid permission. Do not
+set this permission on programs other than \fBpostdrop\fR(1)
+and \fBpostqueue\fR(1).
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as
+\fBpostlogd\fR(8) processes run for only a limited amount
+of time. Use the command "\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed
+up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBmaillog_file (empty)\fR"
+The name of an optional logfile that is written by the Postfix
+\fBpostlogd\fR(8) service.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.IP "\fBpostlogd_watchdog_timeout (10s)\fR"
+How much time a \fBpostlogd\fR(8) process may take to process a request
+before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README_FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+MAILLOG_README, Postfix logging to file or stdout
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 3.4.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/postscreen.8 b/man/man8/postscreen.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d70757
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/postscreen.8
@@ -0,0 +1,463 @@
+.TH POSTSCREEN 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+postscreen
+\-
+Postfix zombie blocker
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBpostscreen\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The Postfix \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server provides additional
+protection against mail server overload. One \fBpostscreen\fR(8)
+process handles multiple inbound SMTP connections, and decides
+which clients may talk to a Postfix SMTP server process.
+By keeping spambots away, \fBpostscreen\fR(8) leaves more
+SMTP server processes available for legitimate clients, and
+delays the onset of server overload conditions.
+
+This program should not be used on SMTP ports that receive
+mail from end\-user clients (MUAs). In a typical deployment,
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8) handles the MX service on TCP port 25, and
+\fBsmtpd\fR(8) receives mail from MUAs on the \fBsubmission\fR
+service (TCP port 587) which requires client authentication.
+Alternatively, a site could set up a dedicated, non\-postscreen,
+"port 25" server that provides \fBsubmission\fR service and
+client authentication, but no MX service.
+
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8) maintains a temporary whitelist for
+clients that have passed a number of tests.  When an SMTP
+client IP address is whitelisted, \fBpostscreen\fR(8) hands
+off the connection immediately to a Postfix SMTP server
+process. This minimizes the overhead for legitimate mail.
+
+By default, \fBpostscreen\fR(8) logs statistics and hands
+off each connection to a Postfix SMTP server process, while
+excluding clients in mynetworks from all tests (primarily,
+to avoid problems with non\-standard SMTP implementations
+in network appliances).  This default mode blocks no clients,
+and is useful for non\-destructive testing.
+
+In a typical production setting, \fBpostscreen\fR(8) is
+configured to reject mail from clients that fail one or
+more tests. \fBpostscreen\fR(8) logs rejected mail with the
+client address, helo, sender and recipient information.
+
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8) is not an SMTP proxy; this is intentional.
+The purpose is to keep spambots away from Postfix SMTP
+server processes, while minimizing overhead for legitimate
+traffic.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server is moderately security\-sensitive.
+It talks to untrusted clients on the network. The process
+can be run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 821 (SMTP protocol)
+RFC 1123 (Host requirements)
+RFC 1652 (8bit\-MIME transport)
+RFC 1869 (SMTP service extensions)
+RFC 1870 (Message Size Declaration)
+RFC 1985 (ETRN command)
+RFC 2034 (SMTP Enhanced Status Codes)
+RFC 2821 (SMTP protocol)
+Not: RFC 2920 (SMTP Pipelining)
+RFC 3030 (CHUNKING without BINARYMIME)
+RFC 3207 (STARTTLS command)
+RFC 3461 (SMTP DSN Extension)
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced Status Codes)
+RFC 5321 (SMTP protocol, including multi\-line 220 banners)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBpostscreen\fR(8) built\-in SMTP protocol engine
+currently does not announce support for AUTH, XCLIENT or
+XFORWARD.
+If you need to make these services available
+on port 25, then do not enable the optional "after 220
+server greeting" tests.
+
+The optional "after 220 server greeting" tests may result in
+unexpected delivery delays from senders that retry email delivery
+from a different IP address.  Reason: after passing these tests a
+new client must disconnect, and reconnect from the same IP
+address before it can deliver mail. See POSTSCREEN_README, section
+"Tests after the 220 SMTP server greeting", for a discussion.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to main.cf are not picked up automatically, as
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8) processes may run for several hours.
+Use the command "postfix reload" after a configuration
+change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+
+NOTE: Some \fBpostscreen\fR(8) parameters implement
+stress\-dependent behavior.  This is supported only when the
+default parameter value is stress\-dependent (that is, it
+looks like ${stress?{X}:{Y}}, or it is the $\fIname\fR
+of an smtpd parameter with a stress\-dependent default).
+Other parameters always evaluate as if the \fBstress\fR
+parameter value is the empty string.
+.SH "COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_command_filter ($smtpd_command_filter)\fR"
+A mechanism to transform commands from remote SMTP clients.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps ($smtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps)\fR"
+Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP client address, with
+case insensitive lists of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth,
+etc.) that the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server will not send in the EHLO response
+to a remote SMTP client.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_discard_ehlo_keywords ($smtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords)\fR"
+A case insensitive list of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls,
+auth, etc.) that the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server will not send in the EHLO
+response to a remote SMTP client.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBdns_ncache_ttl_fix_enable (no)\fR"
+Enable a workaround for future libc incompatibility.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_reject_footer_maps ($smtpd_reject_footer_maps)\fR"
+Optional lookup table for information that is appended after a 4XX
+or 5XX \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server response.
+.SH "TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_expansion_filter (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+List of characters that are permitted in postscreen_reject_footer
+attribute expansions.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_reject_footer ($smtpd_reject_footer)\fR"
+Optional information that is appended after a 4XX or 5XX
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8) server
+response.
+.IP "\fBsoft_bounce (no)\fR"
+Safety net to keep mail queued that would otherwise be returned to
+the sender.
+.SH "BEFORE-POSTSCREEN PROXY AGENT"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Available in Postfix version 2.10 and later:
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_upstream_proxy_protocol (empty)\fR"
+The name of the proxy protocol used by an optional before\-postscreen
+proxy agent.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_upstream_proxy_timeout (5s)\fR"
+The time limit for the proxy protocol specified with the
+postscreen_upstream_proxy_protocol parameter.
+.SH "PERMANENT WHITE/BLACKLIST TEST"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+This test is executed immediately after a remote SMTP client
+connects. If a client is permanently whitelisted, the client
+will be handed off immediately to a Postfix SMTP server
+process.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_access_list (permit_mynetworks)\fR"
+Permanent white/blacklist for remote SMTP client IP addresses.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_blacklist_action (ignore)\fR"
+The action that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) takes when a remote SMTP client is
+permanently blacklisted with the postscreen_access_list parameter.
+.SH "MAIL EXCHANGER POLICY TESTS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+When \fBpostscreen\fR(8) is configured to monitor all primary
+and backup MX addresses, it can refuse to whitelist clients
+that connect to a backup MX address only. For small sites,
+this requires configuring primary and backup MX addresses
+on the same MTA. Larger sites would have to share the
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8) cache between primary and backup MTAs,
+which would introduce a common point of failure.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_whitelist_interfaces (static:all)\fR"
+A list of local \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server IP addresses where a
+non\-whitelisted remote SMTP client can obtain \fBpostscreen\fR(8)'s temporary
+whitelist status.
+.SH "BEFORE 220 GREETING TESTS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+These tests are executed before the remote SMTP client
+receives the "220 servername" greeting. If no tests remain
+after the successful completion of this phase, the client
+will be handed off immediately to a Postfix SMTP server
+process.
+.IP "\fBdnsblog_service_name (dnsblog)\fR"
+The name of the \fBdnsblog\fR(8) service entry in master.cf.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_action (ignore)\fR"
+The action that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) takes when a remote SMTP client's combined
+DNSBL score is equal to or greater than a threshold (as defined
+with the postscreen_dnsbl_sites and postscreen_dnsbl_threshold
+parameters).
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_reply_map (empty)\fR"
+A mapping from actual DNSBL domain name which includes a secret
+password, to the DNSBL domain name that postscreen will reply with
+when it rejects mail.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_sites (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of DNS white/blacklist domains, filters and weight
+factors.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_threshold (1)\fR"
+The inclusive lower bound for blocking a remote SMTP client, based on
+its combined DNSBL score as defined with the postscreen_dnsbl_sites
+parameter.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_greet_action (ignore)\fR"
+The action that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) takes when a remote SMTP client speaks
+before its turn within the time specified with the postscreen_greet_wait
+parameter.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_greet_banner ($smtpd_banner)\fR"
+The \fItext\fR in the optional "220\-\fItext\fR..." server
+response that
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8) sends ahead of the real Postfix SMTP server's "220
+text..." response, in an attempt to confuse bad SMTP clients so
+that they speak before their turn (pre\-greet).
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_greet_wait (normal: 6s, overload: 2s)\fR"
+The amount of time that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) will wait for an SMTP
+client to send a command before its turn, and for DNS blocklist
+lookup results to arrive (default: up to 2 seconds under stress,
+up to 6 seconds otherwise).
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_service_name (smtpd)\fR"
+The internal service that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) hands off allowed
+connections to.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11 and later:
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_whitelist_threshold (0)\fR"
+Allow a remote SMTP client to skip "before" and "after 220
+greeting" protocol tests, based on its combined DNSBL score as
+defined with the postscreen_dnsbl_sites parameter.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_timeout (10s)\fR"
+The time limit for DNSBL or DNSWL lookups.
+.SH "AFTER 220 GREETING TESTS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+These tests are executed after the remote SMTP client
+receives the "220 servername" greeting. If a client passes
+all tests during this phase, it will receive a 4XX response
+to all RCPT TO commands. After the client reconnects, it
+will be allowed to talk directly to a Postfix SMTP server
+process.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_bare_newline_action (ignore)\fR"
+The action that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) takes when a remote SMTP client sends
+a bare newline character, that is, a newline not preceded by carriage
+return.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_bare_newline_enable (no)\fR"
+Enable "bare newline" SMTP protocol tests in the \fBpostscreen\fR(8)
+server.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_disable_vrfy_command ($disable_vrfy_command)\fR"
+Disable the SMTP VRFY command in the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) daemon.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_forbidden_commands ($smtpd_forbidden_commands)\fR"
+List of commands that the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server considers in
+violation of the SMTP protocol.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_helo_required ($smtpd_helo_required)\fR"
+Require that a remote SMTP client sends HELO or EHLO before
+commencing a MAIL transaction.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_non_smtp_command_action (drop)\fR"
+The action that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) takes when a remote SMTP client sends
+non\-SMTP commands as specified with the postscreen_forbidden_commands
+parameter.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_non_smtp_command_enable (no)\fR"
+Enable "non\-SMTP command" tests in the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_pipelining_action (enforce)\fR"
+The action that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) takes when a remote SMTP client
+sends
+multiple commands instead of sending one command and waiting for
+the server to respond.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_pipelining_enable (no)\fR"
+Enable "pipelining" SMTP protocol tests in the \fBpostscreen\fR(8)
+server.
+.SH "CACHE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_cache_cleanup_interval (12h)\fR"
+The amount of time between \fBpostscreen\fR(8) cache cleanup runs.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_cache_map (btree:$data_directory/postscreen_cache)\fR"
+Persistent storage for the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server decisions.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_cache_retention_time (7d)\fR"
+The amount of time that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) will cache an expired
+temporary whitelist entry before it is removed.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_bare_newline_ttl (30d)\fR"
+The amount of time that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) will use the result from
+a successful "bare newline" SMTP protocol test.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_max_ttl (${postscreen_dnsbl_ttl?{$postscreen_dnsbl_ttl}:{1}}h)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) will use the
+result from a successful DNS\-based reputation test before a
+client IP address is required to pass that test again.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_dnsbl_min_ttl (60s)\fR"
+The minimum amount of time that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) will use the
+result from a successful DNS\-based reputation test before a
+client IP address is required to pass that test again.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_greet_ttl (1d)\fR"
+The amount of time that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) will use the result from
+a successful PREGREET test.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_non_smtp_command_ttl (30d)\fR"
+The amount of time that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) will use the result from
+a successful "non_smtp_command" SMTP protocol test.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_pipelining_ttl (30d)\fR"
+The amount of time that \fBpostscreen\fR(8) will use the result from
+a successful "pipelining" SMTP protocol test.
+.SH "RESOURCE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBline_length_limit (2048)\fR"
+Upon input, long lines are chopped up into pieces of at most
+this length; upon delivery, long lines are reconstructed.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_client_connection_count_limit ($smtpd_client_connection_count_limit)\fR"
+How many simultaneous connections any remote SMTP client is
+allowed to have
+with the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) daemon.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_command_count_limit (20)\fR"
+The limit on the total number of commands per SMTP session for
+\fBpostscreen\fR(8)'s built\-in SMTP protocol engine.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_command_time_limit (normal: 300s, overload: 10s)\fR"
+The time limit to read an entire command line with \fBpostscreen\fR(8)'s
+built\-in SMTP protocol engine.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_post_queue_limit ($default_process_limit)\fR"
+The number of clients that can be waiting for service from a
+real Postfix SMTP server process.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_pre_queue_limit ($default_process_limit)\fR"
+The number of non\-whitelisted clients that can be waiting for
+a decision whether they will receive service from a real Postfix
+SMTP server
+process.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_watchdog_timeout (10s)\fR"
+How much time a \fBpostscreen\fR(8) process may take to respond to
+a remote SMTP client command or to perform a cache operation before it
+is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.SH "STARTTLS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_tls_security_level ($smtpd_tls_security_level)\fR"
+The SMTP TLS security level for the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server; when
+a non\-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete parameters
+postscreen_use_tls and postscreen_enforce_tls.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_service_name (tlsproxy)\fR"
+The name of the \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) service entry in master.cf.
+.SH "OBSOLETE STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+These parameters are supported for compatibility with
+\fBsmtpd\fR(8) legacy parameters.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_use_tls ($smtpd_use_tls)\fR"
+Opportunistic TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients,
+but do not require that clients use TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBpostscreen_enforce_tls ($smtpd_enforce_tls)\fR"
+Mandatory TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients, and
+require that clients use TLS encryption.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBcommand_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of all postfix administrative commands.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+smtpd(8), Postfix SMTP server
+tlsproxy(8), Postfix TLS proxy server
+dnsblog(8), DNS black/whitelist logger
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or "\fBpostconf
+html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.nf
+.na
+POSTSCREEN_README, Postfix Postscreen Howto
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.8.
+
+Many ideas in \fBpostscreen\fR(8) were explored in earlier
+work by Michael Tokarev, in OpenBSD spamd, and in MailChannels
+Traffic Control.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/proxymap.8 b/man/man8/proxymap.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e734a2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/proxymap.8
@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
+.TH PROXYMAP 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+proxymap
+\-
+Postfix lookup table proxy server
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBproxymap\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBproxymap\fR(8) server provides read\-only or read\-write
+table lookup service to Postfix processes. These services are
+implemented with distinct service names: \fBproxymap\fR and
+\fBproxywrite\fR, respectively. The purpose of these services is:
+.IP \(bu
+To overcome chroot restrictions. For example, a chrooted SMTP
+server needs access to the system passwd file in order to
+reject mail for non\-existent local addresses, but it is not
+practical to maintain a copy of the passwd file in the chroot
+jail.  The solution:
+.sp
+.nf
+local_recipient_maps =
+    proxy:unix:passwd.byname $alias_maps
+.fi
+.IP \(bu
+To consolidate the number of open lookup tables by sharing
+one open table among multiple processes. For example, making
+mysql connections from every Postfix daemon process results
+in "too many connections" errors. The solution:
+.sp
+.nf
+virtual_alias_maps =
+    proxy:mysql:/etc/postfix/virtual_alias.cf
+.fi
+.sp
+The total number of connections is limited by the number of
+proxymap server processes.
+.IP \(bu
+To provide single\-updater functionality for lookup tables
+that do not reliably support multiple writers (i.e. all
+file\-based tables).
+.PP
+The \fBproxymap\fR(8) server implements the following requests:
+.IP "\fBopen\fR \fImaptype:mapname flags\fR"
+Open the table with type \fImaptype\fR and name \fImapname\fR,
+as controlled by \fIflags\fR. The reply includes the \fImaptype\fR
+dependent flags (to distinguish a fixed string table from a regular
+expression table).
+.IP "\fBlookup\fR \fImaptype:mapname flags key\fR"
+Look up the data stored under the requested key.
+The reply is the request completion status code and
+the lookup result value.
+The \fImaptype:mapname\fR and \fIflags\fR are the same
+as with the \fBopen\fR request.
+.IP "\fBupdate\fR \fImaptype:mapname flags key value\fR"
+Update the data stored under the requested key.
+The reply is the request completion status code.
+The \fImaptype:mapname\fR and \fIflags\fR are the same
+as with the \fBopen\fR request.
+.sp
+To implement single\-updater maps, specify a process limit
+of 1 in the master.cf file entry for the \fBproxywrite\fR
+service.
+.sp
+This request is supported in Postfix 2.5 and later.
+.IP "\fBdelete\fR \fImaptype:mapname flags key\fR"
+Delete the data stored under the requested key.
+The reply is the request completion status code.
+The \fImaptype:mapname\fR and \fIflags\fR are the same
+as with the \fBopen\fR request.
+.sp
+This request is supported in Postfix 2.5 and later.
+.IP "\fBsequence\fR \fImaptype:mapname flags function\fR"
+Iterate over the specified database. The \fIfunction\fR
+is one of DICT_SEQ_FUN_FIRST or DICT_SEQ_FUN_NEXT.
+The reply is the request completion status code and
+a lookup key and result value, if found.
+.sp
+This request is supported in Postfix 2.9 and later.
+.PP
+The request completion status is one of OK, RETRY, NOKEY
+(lookup failed because the key was not found), BAD (malformed
+request) or DENY (the table is not approved for proxy read
+or update access).
+
+There is no \fBclose\fR command, nor are tables implicitly closed
+when a client disconnects. The purpose is to share tables among
+multiple client processes.
+.SH "SERVER PROCESS MANAGEMENT"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+\fBproxymap\fR(8) servers run under control by the Postfix
+\fBmaster\fR(8)
+server.  Each server can handle multiple simultaneous connections.
+When all servers are busy while a client connects, the \fBmaster\fR(8)
+creates a new \fBproxymap\fR(8) server process, provided that the
+process limit is not exceeded.
+Each server terminates after serving at least \fB$max_use\fR clients
+or after \fB$max_idle\fR seconds of idle time.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBproxymap\fR(8) server opens only tables that are
+approved via the \fBproxy_read_maps\fR or \fBproxy_write_maps\fR
+configuration parameters, does not talk to
+users, and can run at fixed low privilege, chrooted or not.
+However, running the proxymap server chrooted severely limits
+usability, because it can open only chrooted tables.
+
+The \fBproxymap\fR(8) server is not a trusted daemon process, and must
+not be used to look up sensitive information such as UNIX user or
+group IDs, mailbox file/directory names or external commands.
+
+In Postfix version 2.2 and later, the proxymap client recognizes
+requests to access a table for security\-sensitive purposes,
+and opens the table directly. This allows the same main.cf
+setting to be used by sensitive and non\-sensitive processes.
+
+Postfix\-writable data files should be stored under a dedicated
+directory that is writable only by the Postfix mail system,
+such as the Postfix\-owned \fBdata_directory\fR.
+
+In particular, Postfix\-writable files should never exist
+in root\-owned directories. That would open up a particular
+type of security hole where ownership of a file or directory
+does not match the provider of its content.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBproxymap\fR(8) server provides service to multiple clients,
+and must therefore not be used for tables that have high\-latency
+lookups.
+
+The \fBproxymap\fR(8) read\-write service does not explicitly
+close lookup tables (even if it did, this could not be relied on,
+because the process may be terminated between table updates).
+The read\-write service should therefore not be used with tables that
+leave persistent storage in an inconsistent state between
+updates (for example, CDB). Tables that support "sync on
+update" should be safe (for example, Berkeley DB) as should
+tables that are implemented by a real DBMS.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+On busy mail systems a long time may pass before
+\fBproxymap\fR(8) relevant
+changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdata_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The directory with Postfix\-writable data files (for example:
+caches, pseudo\-random numbers).
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBproxy_read_maps (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The lookup tables that the \fBproxymap\fR(8) server is allowed to
+access for the read\-only service.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBdata_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The directory with Postfix\-writable data files (for example:
+caches, pseudo\-random numbers).
+.IP "\fBproxy_write_maps (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The lookup tables that the \fBproxymap\fR(8) server is allowed to
+access for the read\-write service.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+DATABASE_README, Postfix lookup table overview
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+The proxymap service was introduced with Postfix 2.0.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/qmgr.8 b/man/man8/qmgr.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a24af71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/qmgr.8
@@ -0,0 +1,495 @@
+.TH QMGR 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+qmgr
+\-
+Postfix queue manager
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBqmgr\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBqmgr\fR(8) daemon awaits the arrival of incoming mail
+and arranges for its delivery via Postfix delivery processes.
+The actual mail routing strategy is delegated to the
+\fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR(8) daemon.
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+Mail addressed to the local \fBdouble\-bounce\fR address is
+logged and discarded.  This stops potential loops caused by
+undeliverable bounce notifications.
+.SH "MAIL QUEUES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBqmgr\fR(8) daemon maintains the following queues:
+.IP \fBincoming\fR
+Inbound mail from the network, or mail picked up by the
+local \fBpickup\fR(8) daemon from the \fBmaildrop\fR directory.
+.IP \fBactive\fR
+Messages that the queue manager has opened for delivery. Only
+a limited number of messages is allowed to enter the \fBactive\fR
+queue (leaky bucket strategy, for a fixed delivery rate).
+.IP \fBdeferred\fR
+Mail that could not be delivered upon the first attempt. The queue
+manager implements exponential backoff by doubling the time between
+delivery attempts.
+.IP \fBcorrupt\fR
+Unreadable or damaged queue files are moved here for inspection.
+.IP \fBhold\fR
+Messages that are kept "on hold" are kept here until someone
+sets them free.
+.SH "DELIVERY STATUS REPORTS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBqmgr\fR(8) daemon keeps an eye on per\-message delivery status
+reports in the following directories. Each status report file has
+the same name as the corresponding message file:
+.IP \fBbounce\fR
+Per\-recipient status information about why mail is bounced.
+These files are maintained by the \fBbounce\fR(8) daemon.
+.IP \fBdefer\fR
+Per\-recipient status information about why mail is delayed.
+These files are maintained by the \fBdefer\fR(8) daemon.
+.IP \fBtrace\fR
+Per\-recipient status information as requested with the
+Postfix "\fBsendmail \-v\fR" or "\fBsendmail \-bv\fR" command.
+These files are maintained by the \fBtrace\fR(8) daemon.
+.PP
+The \fBqmgr\fR(8) daemon is responsible for asking the
+\fBbounce\fR(8), \fBdefer\fR(8) or \fBtrace\fR(8) daemons to
+send delivery reports.
+.SH "STRATEGIES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The queue manager implements a variety of strategies for
+either opening queue files (input) or for message delivery (output).
+.IP "\fBleaky bucket\fR"
+This strategy limits the number of messages in the \fBactive\fR queue
+and prevents the queue manager from running out of memory under
+heavy load.
+.IP \fBfairness\fR
+When the \fBactive\fR queue has room, the queue manager takes one
+message from the \fBincoming\fR queue and one from the \fBdeferred\fR
+queue. This prevents a large mail backlog from blocking the delivery
+of new mail.
+.IP "\fBslow start\fR"
+This strategy eliminates "thundering herd" problems by slowly
+adjusting the number of parallel deliveries to the same destination.
+.IP "\fBround robin\fR"
+The queue manager sorts delivery requests by destination.
+Round\-robin selection prevents one destination from dominating
+deliveries to other destinations.
+.IP "\fBexponential backoff\fR"
+Mail that cannot be delivered upon the first attempt is deferred.
+The time interval between delivery attempts is doubled after each
+attempt.
+.IP "\fBdestination status cache\fR"
+The queue manager avoids unnecessary delivery attempts by
+maintaining a short\-term, in\-memory list of unreachable destinations.
+.IP "\fBpreemptive message scheduling\fR"
+The queue manager attempts to minimize the average per\-recipient delay
+while still preserving the correct per\-message delays, using
+a sophisticated preemptive message scheduling.
+.SH "TRIGGERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+On an idle system, the queue manager waits for the arrival of
+trigger events, or it waits for a timer to go off. A trigger
+is a one\-byte message.
+Depending on the message received, the queue manager performs
+one of the following actions (the message is followed by the
+symbolic constant used internally by the software):
+.IP "\fBD (QMGR_REQ_SCAN_DEFERRED)\fR"
+Start a deferred queue scan.  If a deferred queue scan is already
+in progress, that scan will be restarted as soon as it finishes.
+.IP "\fBI (QMGR_REQ_SCAN_INCOMING)\fR"
+Start an incoming queue scan. If an incoming queue scan is already
+in progress, that scan will be restarted as soon as it finishes.
+.IP "\fBA (QMGR_REQ_SCAN_ALL)\fR"
+Ignore deferred queue file time stamps. The request affects
+the next deferred queue scan.
+.IP "\fBF (QMGR_REQ_FLUSH_DEAD)\fR"
+Purge all information about dead transports and destinations.
+.IP "\fBW (TRIGGER_REQ_WAKEUP)\fR"
+Wakeup call, This is used by the master server to instantiate
+servers that should not go away forever. The action is to start
+an incoming queue scan.
+.PP
+The \fBqmgr\fR(8) daemon reads an entire buffer worth of triggers.
+Multiple identical trigger requests are collapsed into one, and
+trigger requests are sorted so that \fBA\fR and \fBF\fR precede
+\fBD\fR and \fBI\fR. Thus, in order to force a deferred queue run,
+one would request \fBA F D\fR; in order to notify the queue manager
+of the arrival of new mail one would request \fBI\fR.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced status codes)
+RFC 3464 (Delivery status notifications)
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBqmgr\fR(8) daemon is not security sensitive. It reads
+single\-character messages from untrusted local users, and thus may
+be susceptible to denial of service attacks. The \fBqmgr\fR(8) daemon
+does not talk to the outside world, and it can be run at fixed low
+privilege in a chrooted environment.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+Corrupted message files are saved to the \fBcorrupt\fR queue
+for further inspection.
+
+Depending on the setting of the \fBnotify_classes\fR parameter,
+the postmaster is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+A single queue manager process has to compete for disk access with
+multiple front\-end processes such as \fBcleanup\fR(8). A sudden burst of
+inbound mail can negatively impact outbound delivery rates.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are not picked up automatically
+as \fBqmgr\fR(8)
+is a persistent process. Use the "\fBpostfix reload\fR" command after
+a configuration change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+
+In the text below, \fItransport\fR is the first field in a
+\fBmaster.cf\fR entry.
+.SH "COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Available before Postfix version 2.5:
+.IP "\fBallow_min_user (no)\fR"
+Allow a sender or recipient address to have `\-' as the first
+character.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix version 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBdefault_filter_nexthop (empty)\fR"
+When a content_filter or FILTER request specifies no explicit
+next\-hop destination, use $default_filter_nexthop instead; when
+that value is empty, use the domain in the recipient address.
+.SH "ACTIVE QUEUE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBqmgr_clog_warn_time (300s)\fR"
+The minimal delay between warnings that a specific destination is
+clogging up the Postfix active queue.
+.IP "\fBqmgr_message_active_limit (20000)\fR"
+The maximal number of messages in the active queue.
+.IP "\fBqmgr_message_recipient_limit (20000)\fR"
+The maximal number of recipients held in memory by the Postfix
+queue manager, and the maximal size of the short\-term,
+in\-memory "dead" destination status cache.
+.IP "\fBqmgr_message_recipient_minimum (10)\fR"
+The minimal number of in\-memory recipients for any message.
+.IP "\fBdefault_recipient_limit (20000)\fR"
+The default per\-transport upper limit on the number of in\-memory
+recipients.
+.IP "\fBtransport_recipient_limit ($default_recipient_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_recipient_limit
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_extra_recipient_limit (1000)\fR"
+The default value for the extra per\-transport limit imposed on the
+number of in\-memory recipients.
+.IP "\fBtransport_extra_recipient_limit ($default_extra_recipient_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_extra_recipient_limit
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBdefault_recipient_refill_limit (100)\fR"
+The default per\-transport limit on the number of recipients refilled at
+once.
+.IP "\fBtransport_recipient_refill_limit ($default_recipient_refill_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_recipient_refill_limit
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_recipient_refill_delay (5s)\fR"
+The default per\-transport maximum delay between recipients refills.
+.IP "\fBtransport_recipient_refill_delay ($default_recipient_refill_delay)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_recipient_refill_delay
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.SH "DELIVERY CONCURRENCY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBinitial_destination_concurrency (5)\fR"
+The initial per\-destination concurrency level for parallel delivery
+to the same destination.
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_concurrency_limit (20)\fR"
+The default maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same
+destination.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_limit ($default_destination_concurrency_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_limit parameter value, where
+\fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBtransport_initial_destination_concurrency ($initial_destination_concurrency)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the initial_destination_concurrency
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit (1)\fR"
+How many pseudo\-cohorts must suffer connection or handshake
+failure before a specific destination is considered unavailable
+(and further delivery is suspended).
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit ($default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit parameter value,
+where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback (1)\fR"
+The per\-destination amount of delivery concurrency negative
+feedback, after a delivery completes with a connection or handshake
+failure.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback ($default_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback parameter value,
+where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback (1)\fR"
+The per\-destination amount of delivery concurrency positive
+feedback, after a delivery completes without connection or handshake
+failure.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback ($default_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback parameter value,
+where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.IP "\fBdestination_concurrency_feedback_debug (no)\fR"
+Make the queue manager's feedback algorithm verbose for performance
+analysis purposes.
+.SH "RECIPIENT SCHEDULING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_recipient_limit (50)\fR"
+The default maximal number of recipients per message delivery.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_recipient_limit ($default_destination_recipient_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_recipient_limit parameter value, where
+\fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.SH "MESSAGE SCHEDULING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBdefault_delivery_slot_cost (5)\fR"
+How often the Postfix queue manager's scheduler is allowed to
+preempt delivery of one message with another.
+.IP "\fBtransport_delivery_slot_cost ($default_delivery_slot_cost)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_delivery_slot_cost
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_minimum_delivery_slots (3)\fR"
+How many recipients a message must have in order to invoke the
+Postfix queue manager's scheduling algorithm at all.
+.IP "\fBtransport_minimum_delivery_slots ($default_minimum_delivery_slots)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_minimum_delivery_slots
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_delivery_slot_discount (50)\fR"
+The default value for transport\-specific _delivery_slot_discount
+settings.
+.IP "\fBtransport_delivery_slot_discount ($default_delivery_slot_discount)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_delivery_slot_discount
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBdefault_delivery_slot_loan (3)\fR"
+The default value for transport\-specific _delivery_slot_loan
+settings.
+.IP "\fBtransport_delivery_slot_loan ($default_delivery_slot_loan)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_delivery_slot_loan
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.SH "OTHER RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBminimal_backoff_time (300s)\fR"
+The minimal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message;
+prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
+.IP "\fBmaximal_backoff_time (4000s)\fR"
+The maximal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message.
+.IP "\fBmaximal_queue_lifetime (5d)\fR"
+Consider a message as undeliverable, when delivery fails with a
+temporary error, and the time in the queue has reached the
+maximal_queue_lifetime limit.
+.IP "\fBqueue_run_delay (300s)\fR"
+The time between deferred queue scans by the queue manager;
+prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
+.IP "\fBtransport_retry_time (60s)\fR"
+The time between attempts by the Postfix queue manager to contact
+a malfunctioning message delivery transport.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBbounce_queue_lifetime (5d)\fR"
+Consider a bounce message as undeliverable, when delivery fails
+with a temporary error, and the time in the queue has reached the
+bounce_queue_lifetime limit.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBdefault_destination_rate_delay (0s)\fR"
+The default amount of delay that is inserted between individual
+message deliveries to the same destination and over the same message
+delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_rate_delay ($default_destination_rate_delay)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_destination_rate_delay
+parameter value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of
+the message delivery transport.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBdefault_transport_rate_delay (0s)\fR"
+The default amount of delay that is inserted between individual
+message deliveries over the same message delivery transport,
+regardless of destination.
+.IP "\fBtransport_transport_rate_delay ($default_transport_rate_delay)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the default_transport_rate_delay
+parameter value, where the initial \fItransport\fR in the parameter
+name is the master.cf name of the message delivery transport.
+.SH "SAFETY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBqmgr_daemon_timeout (1000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix queue manager process may take to handle
+a request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBqmgr_ipc_timeout (60s)\fR"
+The time limit for the queue manager to send or receive information
+over an internal communication channel.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_pending_request_limit (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A safety limit that prevents address verification requests from
+overwhelming the Postfix queue.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdefer_transports (empty)\fR"
+The names of message delivery transports that should not deliver mail
+unless someone issues "\fBsendmail \-q\fR" or equivalent.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBhelpful_warnings (yes)\fR"
+Log warnings about problematic configuration settings, and provide
+helpful suggestions.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBconfirm_delay_cleared (no)\fR"
+After sending a "your message is delayed" notification, inform
+the sender when the delay clears up.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.SH "FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+/var/spool/postfix/incoming, incoming queue
+/var/spool/postfix/active, active queue
+/var/spool/postfix/deferred, deferred queue
+/var/spool/postfix/bounce, non\-delivery status
+/var/spool/postfix/defer, non\-delivery status
+/var/spool/postfix/trace, delivery status
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+trivial\-rewrite(8), address routing
+bounce(8), delivery status reports
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+SCHEDULER_README, scheduling algorithm
+QSHAPE_README, Postfix queue analysis
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Preemptive scheduler enhancements:
+Patrik Rak
+Modra 6
+155 00, Prague, Czech Republic
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/qmqpd.8 b/man/man8/qmqpd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8da141
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/qmqpd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+.TH QMQPD 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+qmqpd
+\-
+Postfix QMQP server
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBqmqpd\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The Postfix QMQP server receives one message per connection.
+Each message is piped through the \fBcleanup\fR(8)
+daemon, and is placed into the \fBincoming\fR queue as one
+single queue file.  The program expects to be run from the
+\fBmaster\fR(8) process manager.
+
+The QMQP server implements one access policy: only explicitly
+authorized client hosts are allowed to use the service.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The QMQP server is moderately security\-sensitive. It talks to QMQP
+clients and to DNS servers on the network. The QMQP server can be
+run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+The QMQP protocol provides only one server reply per message
+delivery. It is therefore not possible to reject individual
+recipients.
+
+The QMQP protocol requires the server to receive the entire
+message before replying. If a message is malformed, or if any
+netstring component is longer than acceptable, Postfix replies
+immediately and closes the connection. It is left up to the
+client to handle the situation.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as \fBqmqpd\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBcontent_filter (empty)\fR"
+After the message is queued, send the entire message to the
+specified \fItransport:destination\fR.
+.IP "\fBreceive_override_options (empty)\fR"
+Enable or disable recipient validation, built\-in content
+filtering, or address mapping.
+.SH "SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_enable (yes)\fR"
+Enable preliminary SMTPUTF8 support for the protocols described
+in RFC 6531..6533.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_autodetect_classes (sendmail, verify)\fR"
+Detect that a message requires SMTPUTF8 support for the specified
+mail origin classes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_idna2003_compatibility (no)\fR"
+Enable 'transitional' compatibility between IDNA2003 and IDNA2008,
+when converting UTF\-8 domain names to/from the ASCII form that is
+used for DNS lookups.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBline_length_limit (2048)\fR"
+Upon input, long lines are chopped up into pieces of at most
+this length; upon delivery, long lines are reconstructed.
+.IP "\fBhopcount_limit (50)\fR"
+The maximal number of Received:  message headers that is allowed
+in the primary message headers.
+.IP "\fBmessage_size_limit (10240000)\fR"
+The maximal size in bytes of a message, including envelope information.
+.IP "\fBqmqpd_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over the network.
+.SH "TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBdebug_peer_level (2)\fR"
+The increment in verbose logging level when a remote client or
+server matches a pattern in the debug_peer_list parameter.
+.IP "\fBdebug_peer_list (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of remote client or server hostname or network
+address patterns that cause the verbose logging level to increase
+by the amount specified in $debug_peer_level.
+.IP "\fBsoft_bounce (no)\fR"
+Safety net to keep mail queued that would otherwise be returned to
+the sender.
+.SH "TARPIT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBqmqpd_error_delay (1s)\fR"
+How long the Postfix QMQP server will pause before sending a negative
+reply to the remote QMQP client.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqmqpd_authorized_clients (empty)\fR"
+What remote QMQP clients are allowed to connect to the Postfix QMQP
+server port.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.IP "\fBverp_delimiter_filter (\-=+)\fR"
+The characters Postfix accepts as VERP delimiter characters on the
+Postfix \fBsendmail\fR(1) command line and in SMTP commands.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBqmqpd_client_port_logging (no)\fR"
+Enable logging of the remote QMQP client port in addition to
+the hostname and IP address.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+http://cr.yp.to/proto/qmqp.html, QMQP protocol
+cleanup(8), message canonicalization
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+QMQP_README, Postfix ezmlm\-idx howto.
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+The qmqpd service was introduced with Postfix version 1.1.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/scache.8 b/man/man8/scache.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f9fe49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/scache.8
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+.TH SCACHE 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+scache
+\-
+Postfix shared connection cache server
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBscache\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBscache\fR(8) server maintains a shared multi\-connection
+cache. This information can be used by, for example, Postfix
+SMTP clients or other Postfix delivery agents.
+
+The connection cache is organized into logical destination
+names, physical endpoint names, and connections.
+
+As a specific example, logical SMTP destinations specify
+(transport, domain, port), and physical SMTP endpoints
+specify (transport, IP address, port).  An SMTP connection
+may be saved after a successful mail transaction.
+
+In the general case, one logical destination may refer to
+zero or more physical endpoints, one physical endpoint may
+be referenced by zero or more logical destinations, and
+one endpoint may refer to zero or more connections.
+
+The exact syntax of a logical destination or endpoint name
+is application dependent; the \fBscache\fR(8) server does
+not care.  A connection is stored as a file descriptor together
+with application\-dependent information that is needed to
+re\-activate a connection object. Again, the \fBscache\fR(8)
+server is completely unaware of the details of that
+information.
+
+All information is stored with a finite time to live (ttl).
+The connection cache daemon terminates when no client is
+connected for \fBmax_idle\fR time units.
+
+This server implements the following requests:
+.IP "\fBsave_endp\fI ttl endpoint endpoint_properties file_descriptor\fR"
+Save the specified file descriptor and connection property data
+under the specified endpoint name. The endpoint properties
+are used by the client to re\-activate a passivated connection
+object.
+.IP "\fBfind_endp\fI endpoint\fR"
+Look up cached properties and a cached file descriptor for the
+specified endpoint.
+.IP "\fBsave_dest\fI ttl destination destination_properties endpoint\fR"
+Save the binding between a logical destination and an
+endpoint under the destination name, together with destination
+specific connection properties. The destination properties
+are used by the client to re\-activate a passivated connection
+object.
+.IP "\fBfind_dest\fI destination\fR"
+Look up cached destination properties, cached endpoint properties,
+and a cached file descriptor for the specified logical destination.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBscache\fR(8) server is not security\-sensitive. It does not
+talk to the network, and it does not talk to local users.
+The \fBscache\fR(8) server can run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+
+The \fBscache\fR(8) server is not a trusted process. It must
+not be used to store information that is security sensitive.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+The session cache cannot be shared among multiple machines.
+
+When a connection expires from the cache, it is closed without
+the appropriate protocol specific handshake.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically as \fBscache\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "RESOURCE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconnection_cache_ttl_limit (2s)\fR"
+The maximal time\-to\-live value that the \fBscache\fR(8) connection
+cache server
+allows.
+.IP "\fBconnection_cache_status_update_time (600s)\fR"
+How frequently the \fBscache\fR(8) server logs usage statistics with
+connection cache hit and miss rates for logical destinations and for
+physical endpoints.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+smtp(8), SMTP client
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+CONNECTION_CACHE_README, Postfix connection cache
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.2.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/showq.8 b/man/man8/showq.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..624ae74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/showq.8
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+.TH SHOWQ 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+showq
+\-
+list the Postfix mail queue
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBshowq\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBshowq\fR(8) daemon reports the Postfix mail queue status.
+The output is meant to be formatted by the postqueue(1) command,
+as it emulates the Sendmail `mailq' command.
+
+The \fBshowq\fR(8) daemon can also be run in stand\-alone mode
+by the superuser. This mode of operation is used to emulate
+the `mailq' command while the Postfix mail system is down.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBshowq\fR(8) daemon can run in a chroot jail at fixed low
+privilege, and takes no input from the client. Its service port
+is accessible to local untrusted users, so the service can be
+susceptible to denial of service attacks.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+None. The \fBshowq\fR(8) daemon does not interact with the
+outside world.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically as \fBshowq\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBduplicate_filter_limit (1000)\fR"
+The maximal number of addresses remembered by the address
+duplicate filter for \fBaliases\fR(5) or \fBvirtual\fR(5) alias expansion, or
+for \fBshowq\fR(8) queue displays.
+.IP "\fBempty_address_recipient (MAILER\-DAEMON)\fR"
+The recipient of mail addressed to the null address.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_long_queue_ids (no)\fR"
+Enable long, non\-repeating, queue IDs (queue file names).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+/var/spool/postfix, queue directories
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+pickup(8), local mail pickup service
+cleanup(8), canonicalize and enqueue mail
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/smtp.8 b/man/man8/smtp.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7fc960
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/smtp.8
@@ -0,0 +1,943 @@
+.TH SMTP 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+smtp
+\-
+Postfix SMTP+LMTP client
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBsmtp\fR [generic Postfix daemon options] [flags=DORX]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The Postfix SMTP+LMTP client implements the SMTP and LMTP mail
+delivery protocols. It processes message delivery requests from
+the queue manager. Each request specifies a queue file, a sender
+address, a domain or host to deliver to, and recipient information.
+This program expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+
+The SMTP+LMTP client updates the queue file and marks recipients
+as finished, or it informs the queue manager that delivery should
+be tried again at a later time. Delivery status reports are sent
+to the \fBbounce\fR(8), \fBdefer\fR(8) or \fBtrace\fR(8) daemon as
+appropriate.
+
+The SMTP+LMTP client looks up a list of mail exchanger addresses for
+the destination host, sorts the list by preference, and connects
+to each listed address until it finds a server that responds.
+
+When a server is not reachable, or when mail delivery fails due
+to a recoverable error condition, the SMTP+LMTP client will try to
+deliver the mail to an alternate host.
+
+After a successful mail transaction, a connection may be saved
+to the \fBscache\fR(8) connection cache server, so that it
+may be used by any SMTP+LMTP client for a subsequent transaction.
+
+By default, connection caching is enabled temporarily for
+destinations that have a high volume of mail in the active
+queue. Connection caching can be enabled permanently for
+specific destinations.
+.SH "SMTP DESTINATION SYNTAX"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Postfix SMTP+LMTP client supports multiple destinations
+separated by comma or whitespace (Postfix 3.5 and later).
+SMTP destinations have the following form:
+.IP \fIdomainname\fR
+.IP \fIdomainname\fR:\fIport\fR
+Look up the mail exchangers for the specified domain, and
+connect to the specified port (default: \fBsmtp\fR).
+.IP [\fIhostname\fR]
+.IP [\fIhostname\fR]:\fIport\fR
+Look up the address(es) of the specified host, and connect to
+the specified port (default: \fBsmtp\fR).
+.IP [\fIaddress\fR]
+.IP [\fIaddress\fR]:\fIport\fR
+Connect to the host at the specified address, and connect
+to the specified port (default: \fBsmtp\fR). An IPv6 address
+must be formatted as [\fBipv6\fR:\fIaddress\fR].
+.SH "LMTP DESTINATION SYNTAX"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Postfix SMTP+LMTP client supports multiple destinations
+separated by comma or whitespace (Postfix 3.5 and later).
+LMTP destinations have the following form:
+.IP \fBunix\fR:\fIpathname\fR
+Connect to the local UNIX\-domain server that is bound to the specified
+\fIpathname\fR. If the process runs chrooted, an absolute pathname
+is interpreted relative to the Postfix queue directory.
+.IP \fBinet\fR:\fIhostname\fR
+.IP \fBinet\fR:\fIhostname\fR:\fIport\fR
+.IP \fBinet\fR:[\fIaddress\fR]
+.IP \fBinet\fR:[\fIaddress\fR]:\fIport\fR
+Connect to the specified TCP port on the specified local or
+remote host. If no port is specified, connect to the port defined as
+\fBlmtp\fR in \fBservices\fR(4).
+If no such service is found, the \fBlmtp_tcp_port\fR configuration
+parameter (default value of 24) will be used.
+An IPv6 address must be formatted as [\fBipv6\fR:\fIaddress\fR].
+.SH "SINGLE-RECIPIENT DELIVERY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+By default, the Postfix SMTP+LMTP client delivers mail to
+multiple recipients per delivery request. This is undesirable
+when prepending a \fBDelivered\-to:\fR or \fBX\-Original\-To:\fR
+message header. To prevent Postfix from sending multiple
+recipients per delivery request, specify
+.sp
+.nf
+    \fItransport\fB_destination_recipient_limit = 1\fR
+.fi
+
+in the Postfix \fBmain.cf\fR file, where \fItransport\fR
+is the name in the first column of the Postfix \fBmaster.cf\fR
+entry for this mail delivery service.
+.SH "COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBflags=DORX\fR (optional)"
+Optional message processing flags.
+.RS
+.IP \fBD\fR
+Prepend a "\fBDelivered\-To: \fIrecipient\fR" message header
+with the envelope recipient address. Note: for this to work,
+the \fItransport\fB_destination_recipient_limit\fR must be
+1 (see SINGLE\-RECIPIENT DELIVERY above for details).
+.sp
+The \fBD\fR flag also enforces loop detection: if a message
+already contains a \fBDelivered\-To:\fR header with the same
+recipient address, then the message is returned as
+undeliverable. The address comparison is case insensitive.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 3.5.
+.IP \fBO\fR
+Prepend an "\fBX\-Original\-To: \fIrecipient\fR" message
+header with the recipient address as given to Postfix. Note:
+for this to work, the
+\fItransport\fB_destination_recipient_limit\fR must be 1
+(see SINGLE\-RECIPIENT DELIVERY above for details).
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 3.5.
+.IP \fBR\fR
+Prepend a "\fBReturn\-Path: <\fIsender\fB>\fR" message header
+with the envelope sender address.
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 3.5.
+.IP \fBX\fR
+Indicates that the delivery is final. This flag affects
+the status reported in "success" DSN (delivery status
+notification) messages, and changes it from "relayed" into
+"delivered".
+.sp
+This feature is available as of Postfix 3.5.
+.RE
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+The SMTP+LMTP client is moderately security\-sensitive. It
+talks to SMTP or LMTP servers and to DNS servers on the
+network. The SMTP+LMTP client can be run chrooted at fixed
+low privilege.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 821 (SMTP protocol)
+RFC 822 (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
+RFC 1651 (SMTP service extensions)
+RFC 1652 (8bit\-MIME transport)
+RFC 1870 (Message Size Declaration)
+RFC 2033 (LMTP protocol)
+RFC 2034 (SMTP Enhanced Error Codes)
+RFC 2045 (MIME: Format of Internet Message Bodies)
+RFC 2046 (MIME: Media Types)
+RFC 2554 (AUTH command)
+RFC 2821 (SMTP protocol)
+RFC 2920 (SMTP Pipelining)
+RFC 3207 (STARTTLS command)
+RFC 3461 (SMTP DSN Extension)
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced Status Codes)
+RFC 4954 (AUTH command)
+RFC 5321 (SMTP protocol)
+RFC 6531 (Internationalized SMTP)
+RFC 6533 (Internationalized Delivery Status Notifications)
+RFC 7672 (SMTP security via opportunistic DANE TLS)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+Corrupted message files are marked so that the queue manager can
+move them to the \fBcorrupt\fR queue for further inspection.
+
+Depending on the setting of the \fBnotify_classes\fR parameter,
+the postmaster is notified of bounces, protocol problems, and of
+other trouble.
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+SMTP and LMTP connection reuse for TLS (without closing the
+SMTP or LMTP connection) is not supported before Postfix 3.4.
+
+SMTP and LMTP connection reuse assumes that SASL credentials
+are valid for all destinations that map onto the same IP
+address and TCP port.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Before Postfix version 2.3, the LMTP client is a separate
+program that implements only a subset of the functionality
+available with SMTP: there is no support for TLS, and
+connections are cached in\-process, making it ineffective
+when the client is used for multiple domains.
+
+Most smtp_\fIxxx\fR configuration parameters have an
+lmtp_\fIxxx\fR "mirror" parameter for the equivalent LMTP
+feature. This document describes only those LMTP\-related
+parameters that aren't simply "mirror" parameters.
+
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as \fBsmtp\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBignore_mx_lookup_error (no)\fR"
+Ignore DNS MX lookups that produce no response.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_always_send_ehlo (yes)\fR"
+Always send EHLO at the start of an SMTP session.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_never_send_ehlo (no)\fR"
+Never send EHLO at the start of an SMTP session.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_defer_if_no_mx_address_found (no)\fR"
+Defer mail delivery when no MX record resolves to an IP address.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_line_length_limit (998)\fR"
+The maximal length of message header and body lines that Postfix
+will send via SMTP.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_pix_workaround_delay_time (10s)\fR"
+How long the Postfix SMTP client pauses before sending
+".<CR><LF>" in order to work around the PIX firewall
+"<CR><LF>.<CR><LF>" bug.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time (500s)\fR"
+How long a message must be queued before the Postfix SMTP client
+turns on the PIX firewall "<CR><LF>.<CR><LF>"
+bug workaround for delivery through firewalls with "smtp fixup"
+mode turned on.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_pix_workarounds (disable_esmtp, delay_dotcrlf)\fR"
+A list that specifies zero or more workarounds for CISCO PIX
+firewall bugs.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_pix_workaround_maps (empty)\fR"
+Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP server address, with
+per\-destination workarounds for CISCO PIX firewall bugs.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_quote_rfc821_envelope (yes)\fR"
+Quote addresses in Postfix SMTP client MAIL FROM and RCPT TO commands
+as required
+by RFC 5321.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_reply_filter (empty)\fR"
+A mechanism to transform replies from remote SMTP servers one
+line at a time.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_skip_5xx_greeting (yes)\fR"
+Skip remote SMTP servers that greet with a 5XX status code.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_skip_quit_response (yes)\fR"
+Do not wait for the response to the SMTP QUIT command.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and earlier:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_skip_4xx_greeting (yes)\fR"
+Skip SMTP servers that greet with a 4XX status code (go away, try
+again later).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps (empty)\fR"
+Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP server address, with
+case insensitive lists of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth,
+etc.) that the Postfix SMTP client will ignore in the EHLO response from a
+remote SMTP server.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_discard_ehlo_keywords (empty)\fR"
+A case insensitive list of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls,
+auth, etc.) that the Postfix SMTP client will ignore in the EHLO
+response from a remote SMTP server.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_generic_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables that perform address rewriting in the
+Postfix SMTP client, typically to transform a locally valid address into
+a globally valid address when sending mail across the Internet.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_cname_overrides_servername (version dependent)\fR"
+When the remote SMTP servername is a DNS CNAME, replace the
+servername with the result from CNAME expansion for the purpose of
+logging, SASL password lookup, TLS
+policy decisions, or TLS certificate verification.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBlmtp_discard_lhlo_keyword_address_maps (empty)\fR"
+Lookup tables, indexed by the remote LMTP server address, with
+case insensitive lists of LHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls,
+auth, etc.) that the Postfix LMTP client will ignore in the LHLO
+response
+from a remote LMTP server.
+.IP "\fBlmtp_discard_lhlo_keywords (empty)\fR"
+A case insensitive list of LHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls,
+auth, etc.) that the Postfix LMTP client will ignore in the LHLO
+response
+from a remote LMTP server.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.4.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBsend_cyrus_sasl_authzid (no)\fR"
+When authenticating to a remote SMTP or LMTP server with the
+default setting "no", send no SASL authoriZation ID (authzid); send
+only the SASL authentiCation ID (authcid) plus the authcid's password.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_header_checks (empty)\fR"
+Restricted \fBheader_checks\fR(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP client.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_mime_header_checks (empty)\fR"
+Restricted \fBmime_header_checks\fR(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP
+client.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_nested_header_checks (empty)\fR"
+Restricted \fBnested_header_checks\fR(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP
+client.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_body_checks (empty)\fR"
+Restricted \fBbody_checks\fR(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP client.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.6 and later:
+.IP "\fBtcp_windowsize (0)\fR"
+An optional workaround for routers that break TCP window scaling.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.8 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_dns_resolver_options (empty)\fR"
+DNS Resolver options for the Postfix SMTP client.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_per_record_deadline (no)\fR"
+Change the behavior of the smtp_*_timeout time limits, from a
+time limit per read or write system call, to a time limit to send
+or receive a complete record (an SMTP command line, SMTP response
+line, SMTP message content line, or TLS protocol message).
+.IP "\fBsmtp_send_dummy_mail_auth (no)\fR"
+Whether or not to append the "AUTH=<>" option to the MAIL
+FROM command in SASL\-authenticated SMTP sessions.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_dns_support_level (empty)\fR"
+Level of DNS support in the Postfix SMTP client.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_delivery_status_filter ($default_delivery_status_filter)\fR"
+Optional filter for the \fBsmtp\fR(8) delivery agent to change the
+delivery status code or explanatory text of successful or unsuccessful
+deliveries.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_dns_reply_filter (empty)\fR"
+Optional filter for Postfix SMTP client DNS lookup results.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_balance_inet_protocols (yes)\fR"
+When a remote destination resolves to a combination of IPv4 and
+IPv6 addresses, ensure that the Postfix SMTP client can try both
+address types before it runs into the smtp_mx_address_limit.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBdnssec_probe (ns:.)\fR"
+The DNS query type (default: "ns") and DNS query name (default:
+".") that Postfix may use to determine whether DNSSEC validation
+is available.
+.SH "MIME PROCESSING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBdisable_mime_output_conversion (no)\fR"
+Disable the conversion of 8BITMIME format to 7BIT format.
+.IP "\fBmime_boundary_length_limit (2048)\fR"
+The maximal length of MIME multipart boundary strings.
+.IP "\fBmime_nesting_limit (100)\fR"
+The maximal recursion level that the MIME processor will handle.
+.SH "EXTERNAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_send_xforward_command (no)\fR"
+Send the non\-standard XFORWARD command when the Postfix SMTP server
+EHLO response announces XFORWARD support.
+.SH "SASL AUTHENTICATION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_auth_enable (no)\fR"
+Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix SMTP client.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_password_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional Postfix SMTP client lookup tables with one username:password
+entry per sender, remote hostname or next\-hop domain.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_security_options (noplaintext, noanonymous)\fR"
+Postfix SMTP client SASL security options; as of Postfix 2.3
+the list of available
+features depends on the SASL client implementation that is selected
+with \fBsmtp_sasl_type\fR.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_mechanism_filter (empty)\fR"
+If non\-empty, a Postfix SMTP client filter for the remote SMTP
+server's list of offered SASL mechanisms.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sender_dependent_authentication (no)\fR"
+Enable sender\-dependent authentication in the Postfix SMTP client; this is
+available only with SASL authentication, and disables SMTP connection
+caching to ensure that mail from different senders will use the
+appropriate credentials.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_path (empty)\fR"
+Implementation\-specific information that the Postfix SMTP client
+passes through to
+the SASL plug\-in implementation that is selected with
+\fBsmtp_sasl_type\fR.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_type (cyrus)\fR"
+The SASL plug\-in type that the Postfix SMTP client should use
+for authentication.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_auth_cache_name (empty)\fR"
+An optional table to prevent repeated SASL authentication
+failures with the same remote SMTP server hostname, username and
+password.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_auth_cache_time (90d)\fR"
+The maximal age of an smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name entry before it
+is removed.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce (yes)\fR"
+When a remote SMTP server rejects a SASL authentication request
+with a 535 reply code, defer mail delivery instead of returning
+mail as undeliverable.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_send_dummy_mail_auth (no)\fR"
+Whether or not to append the "AUTH=<>" option to the MAIL
+FROM command in SASL\-authenticated SMTP sessions.
+.SH "STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Detailed information about STARTTLS configuration may be found
+in the TLS_README document.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_security_level (empty)\fR"
+The default SMTP TLS security level for the Postfix SMTP client;
+when a non\-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete
+parameters smtp_use_tls, smtp_enforce_tls, and smtp_tls_enforce_peername.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_tls_security_options ($smtp_sasl_security_options)\fR"
+The SASL authentication security options that the Postfix SMTP
+client uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_starttls_timeout (300s)\fR"
+Time limit for Postfix SMTP client write and read operations
+during TLS startup and shutdown handshake procedures.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_CAfile (empty)\fR"
+A file containing CA certificates of root CAs trusted to sign
+either remote SMTP server certificates or intermediate CA certificates.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_CApath (empty)\fR"
+Directory with PEM format Certification Authority certificates
+that the Postfix SMTP client uses to verify a remote SMTP server
+certificate.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_cert_file (empty)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP client RSA certificate in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers (medium)\fR"
+The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP client will
+use with
+mandatory TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_exclude_ciphers (empty)\fR"
+List of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the Postfix
+SMTP client cipher
+list at all TLS security levels.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (empty)\fR"
+Additional list of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the
+Postfix SMTP client cipher list at mandatory TLS security levels.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_dcert_file (empty)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP client DSA certificate in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_dkey_file ($smtp_tls_dcert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP client DSA private key in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_key_file ($smtp_tls_cert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP client RSA private key in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_loglevel (0)\fR"
+Enable additional Postfix SMTP client logging of TLS activity.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_note_starttls_offer (no)\fR"
+Log the hostname of a remote SMTP server that offers STARTTLS,
+when TLS is not already enabled for that server.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_policy_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with the Postfix SMTP client TLS security
+policy by next\-hop destination; when a non\-empty value is specified,
+this overrides the obsolete smtp_tls_per_site parameter.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_mandatory_protocols (!SSLv2, !SSLv3)\fR"
+List of SSL/TLS protocols that the Postfix SMTP client will use with
+mandatory TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_scert_verifydepth (9)\fR"
+The verification depth for remote SMTP server certificates.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_secure_cert_match (nexthop, dot\-nexthop)\fR"
+How the Postfix SMTP client verifies the server certificate
+peername for the "secure" TLS security level.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_session_cache_database (empty)\fR"
+Name of the file containing the optional Postfix SMTP client
+TLS session cache.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_session_cache_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The expiration time of Postfix SMTP client TLS session cache
+information.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_verify_cert_match (hostname)\fR"
+How the Postfix SMTP client verifies the server certificate
+peername for the
+"verify" TLS security level.
+.IP "\fBtls_daemon_random_bytes (32)\fR"
+The number of pseudo\-random bytes that an \fBsmtp\fR(8) or \fBsmtpd\fR(8)
+process requests from the \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) server in order to seed its
+internal pseudo random number generator (PRNG).
+.IP "\fBtls_high_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "high" grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_medium_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "medium" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_low_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "low" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_export_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "export" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_null_cipherlist (eNULL:!aNULL)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "NULL" grade ciphers that provide
+authentication without encryption.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_sasl_tls_verified_security_options ($smtp_sasl_tls_security_options)\fR"
+The SASL authentication security options that the Postfix SMTP
+client uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions with a verified server
+certificate.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match (empty)\fR"
+List of acceptable remote SMTP server certificate fingerprints for
+the "fingerprint" TLS security level (\fBsmtp_tls_security_level\fR =
+fingerprint).
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_fingerprint_digest (md5)\fR"
+The message digest algorithm used to construct remote SMTP server
+certificate fingerprints.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.6 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_protocols (!SSLv2, !SSLv3)\fR"
+List of TLS protocols that the Postfix SMTP client will exclude or
+include with opportunistic TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_ciphers (medium)\fR"
+The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP client
+will use with opportunistic TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_eccert_file (empty)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP client ECDSA certificate in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_eckey_file ($smtp_tls_eccert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP client ECDSA private key in PEM format.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_block_early_mail_reply (no)\fR"
+Try to detect a mail hijacking attack based on a TLS protocol
+vulnerability (CVE\-2009\-3555), where an attacker prepends malicious
+HELO, MAIL, RCPT, DATA commands to a Postfix SMTP client TLS session.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.8 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_disable_workarounds (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+List or bit\-mask of OpenSSL bug work\-arounds to disable.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11\-3.1:
+.IP "\fBtls_dane_digest_agility (on)\fR"
+Configure RFC7671 DANE TLSA digest algorithm agility.
+.IP "\fBtls_dane_trust_anchor_digest_enable (yes)\fR"
+Enable support for RFC 6698 (DANE TLSA) DNS records that contain
+digests of trust\-anchors with certificate usage "2".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_trust_anchor_file (empty)\fR"
+Zero or more PEM\-format files with trust\-anchor certificates
+and/or public keys.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_force_insecure_host_tlsa_lookup (no)\fR"
+Lookup the associated DANE TLSA RRset even when a hostname is
+not an alias and its address records lie in an unsigned zone.
+.IP "\fBtlsmgr_service_name (tlsmgr)\fR"
+The name of the \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) service entry in master.cf.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_wrappermode (no)\fR"
+Request that the Postfix SMTP client connects using the
+legacy SMTPS protocol instead of using the STARTTLS command.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_dane_insecure_mx_policy (dane)\fR"
+The TLS policy for MX hosts with "secure" TLSA records when the
+nexthop destination security level is \fBdane\fR, but the MX
+record was found via an "insecure" MX lookup.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_connection_reuse (no)\fR"
+Try to make multiple deliveries per TLS\-encrypted connection.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_chain_files (empty)\fR"
+List of one or more PEM files, each holding one or more private keys
+directly followed by a corresponding certificate chain.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_servername (empty)\fR"
+Optional name to send to the remote SMTP server in the TLS Server
+Name Indication (SNI) extension.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5, 3.4.6, 3.3.5, 3.2.10, 3.1.13 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_fast_shutdown_enable (yes)\fR"
+A workaround for implementations that hang Postfix while shutting
+down a TLS session, until Postfix times out.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.9, 3.8.1, 3.7.6, 3.6.10, 3.5.20 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_config_file (default)\fR"
+Optional configuration file with baseline OpenSSL settings.
+.IP "\fBtls_config_name (empty)\fR"
+The application name passed by Postfix to OpenSSL library
+initialization functions.
+.SH "OBSOLETE STARTTLS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following configuration parameters exist for compatibility
+with Postfix versions before 2.3. Support for these will
+be removed in a future release.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_use_tls (no)\fR"
+Opportunistic mode: use TLS when a remote SMTP server announces
+STARTTLS support, otherwise send the mail in the clear.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_enforce_tls (no)\fR"
+Enforcement mode: require that remote SMTP servers use TLS
+encryption, and never send mail in the clear.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_enforce_peername (yes)\fR"
+With mandatory TLS encryption, require that the remote SMTP
+server hostname matches the information in the remote SMTP server
+certificate.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_per_site (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with the Postfix SMTP client TLS usage
+policy by next\-hop destination and by remote SMTP server hostname.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_cipherlist (empty)\fR"
+Obsolete Postfix < 2.3 control for the Postfix SMTP client TLS
+cipher list.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBsmtp_connect_timeout (30s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for completing a TCP connection, or
+zero (use the operating system built\-in time limit).
+.IP "\fBsmtp_helo_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the HELO or EHLO command,
+and for receiving the initial remote SMTP server response.
+.IP "\fBlmtp_lhlo_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the LHLO command,
+and for receiving the initial remote LMTP server response.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_xforward_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the XFORWARD command,
+and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_mail_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the MAIL FROM command,
+and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_rcpt_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP RCPT TO
+command, and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_data_init_timeout (120s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP DATA command,
+and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_data_xfer_timeout (180s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP message content.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_data_done_timeout (600s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP ".", and
+for receiving the remote SMTP server response.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_quit_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the QUIT command,
+and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_mx_address_limit (5)\fR"
+The maximal number of MX (mail exchanger) IP addresses that can
+result from Postfix SMTP client mail exchanger lookups, or zero (no
+limit).
+.IP "\fBsmtp_mx_session_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of SMTP sessions per delivery request before
+the Postfix SMTP client
+gives up or delivers to a fall\-back relay host, or zero (no
+limit).
+.IP "\fBsmtp_rset_timeout (20s)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the RSET command,
+and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and earlier:
+.IP "\fBlmtp_cache_connection (yes)\fR"
+Keep Postfix LMTP client connections open for up to $max_idle
+seconds.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_connection_cache_destinations (empty)\fR"
+Permanently enable SMTP connection caching for the specified
+destinations.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_connection_cache_on_demand (yes)\fR"
+Temporarily enable SMTP connection caching while a destination
+has a high volume of mail in the active queue.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_connection_reuse_time_limit (300s)\fR"
+The amount of time during which Postfix will use an SMTP
+connection repeatedly.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_connection_cache_time_limit (2s)\fR"
+When SMTP connection caching is enabled, the amount of time that
+an unused SMTP client socket is kept open before it is closed.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBconnection_cache_protocol_timeout (5s)\fR"
+Time limit for connection cache connect, send or receive
+operations.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_per_record_deadline (no)\fR"
+Change the behavior of the smtp_*_timeout time limits, from a
+time limit per read or write system call, to a time limit to send
+or receive a complete record (an SMTP command line, SMTP response
+line, SMTP message content line, or TLS protocol message).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_connection_reuse_count_limit (0)\fR"
+When SMTP connection caching is enabled, the number of times
+that an SMTP session may be reused before it is closed, or zero (no
+limit).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_connection_reuse (no)\fR"
+Try to make multiple deliveries per TLS\-encrypted connection.
+.PP
+Implemented in the qmgr(8) daemon:
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_concurrency_limit ($default_destination_concurrency_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_concurrency_limit parameter value, where
+\fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.IP "\fBtransport_destination_recipient_limit ($default_destination_recipient_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the
+default_destination_recipient_limit parameter value, where
+\fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message delivery
+transport.
+.SH "SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_enable (yes)\fR"
+Enable preliminary SMTPUTF8 support for the protocols described
+in RFC 6531..6533.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_autodetect_classes (sendmail, verify)\fR"
+Detect that a message requires SMTPUTF8 support for the specified
+mail origin classes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_idna2003_compatibility (no)\fR"
+Enable 'transitional' compatibility between IDNA2003 and IDNA2008,
+when converting UTF\-8 domain names to/from the ASCII form that is
+used for DNS lookups.
+.SH "TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBdebug_peer_level (2)\fR"
+The increment in verbose logging level when a remote client or
+server matches a pattern in the debug_peer_list parameter.
+.IP "\fBdebug_peer_list (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of remote client or server hostname or network
+address patterns that cause the verbose logging level to increase
+by the amount specified in $debug_peer_level.
+.IP "\fBerror_notice_recipient (postmaster)\fR"
+The recipient of postmaster notifications about mail delivery
+problems that are caused by policy, resource, software or protocol
+errors.
+.IP "\fBinternal_mail_filter_classes (empty)\fR"
+What categories of Postfix\-generated mail are subject to
+before\-queue content inspection by non_smtpd_milters, header_checks
+and body_checks.
+.IP "\fBnotify_classes (resource, software)\fR"
+The list of error classes that are reported to the postmaster.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBbest_mx_transport (empty)\fR"
+Where the Postfix SMTP client should deliver mail when it detects
+a "mail loops back to myself" error condition.
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBdisable_dns_lookups (no)\fR"
+Disable DNS lookups in the Postfix SMTP and LMTP clients.
+.IP "\fBinet_interfaces (all)\fR"
+The network interface addresses that this mail system receives
+mail on.
+.IP "\fBinet_protocols (all)\fR"
+The Internet protocols Postfix will attempt to use when making
+or accepting connections.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBlmtp_assume_final (no)\fR"
+When a remote LMTP server announces no DSN support, assume that
+the
+server performs final delivery, and send "delivered" delivery status
+notifications instead of "relayed".
+.IP "\fBlmtp_tcp_port (24)\fR"
+The default TCP port that the Postfix LMTP client connects to.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBproxy_interfaces (empty)\fR"
+The network interface addresses that this mail system receives mail
+on by way of a proxy or network address translation unit.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_address_preference (any)\fR"
+The address type ("ipv6", "ipv4" or "any") that the Postfix
+SMTP client will try first, when a destination has IPv6 and IPv4
+addresses with equal MX preference.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_bind_address (empty)\fR"
+An optional numerical network address that the Postfix SMTP client
+should bind to when making an IPv4 connection.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_bind_address6 (empty)\fR"
+An optional numerical network address that the Postfix SMTP client
+should bind to when making an IPv6 connection.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_helo_name ($myhostname)\fR"
+The hostname to send in the SMTP HELO or EHLO command.
+.IP "\fBlmtp_lhlo_name ($myhostname)\fR"
+The hostname to send in the LMTP LHLO command.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_host_lookup (dns)\fR"
+What mechanisms the Postfix SMTP client uses to look up a host's
+IP address.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_randomize_addresses (yes)\fR"
+Randomize the order of equal\-preference MX host addresses.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available with Postfix 2.2 and earlier:
+.IP "\fBfallback_relay (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of relay hosts for SMTP destinations that can't be
+found or that are unreachable.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_fallback_relay ($fallback_relay)\fR"
+Optional list of relay hosts for SMTP destinations that can't be
+found or that are unreachable.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_address_verify_target (rcpt)\fR"
+In the context of email address verification, the SMTP protocol
+stage that determines whether an email address is deliverable.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBlmtp_fallback_relay (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of relay hosts for LMTP destinations that can't be
+found or that are unreachable.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tcp_port (smtp)\fR"
+The default TCP port that the Postfix SMTP client connects to.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+generic(5), output address rewriting
+header_checks(5), message header content inspection
+body_checks(5), body parts content inspection
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+bounce(8), delivery status reports
+scache(8), connection cache server
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+tlsmgr(8), TLS session and PRNG management
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+SASL_README, Postfix SASL howto
+TLS_README, Postfix STARTTLS howto
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
+
+Command pipelining in cooperation with:
+Jon Ribbens
+Oaktree Internet Solutions Ltd.,
+Internet House,
+Canal Basin,
+Coventry,
+CV1 4LY, United Kingdom.
+
+SASL support originally by:
+Till Franke
+SuSE Rhein/Main AG
+65760 Eschborn, Germany
+
+TLS support originally by:
+Lutz Jaenicke
+BTU Cottbus
+Allgemeine Elektrotechnik
+Universitaetsplatz 3\-4
+D\-03044 Cottbus, Germany
+
+Revised TLS and SMTP connection cache support by:
+Victor Duchovni
+Morgan Stanley
diff --git a/man/man8/smtpd.8 b/man/man8/smtpd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aac13b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/smtpd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,1243 @@
+.TH SMTPD 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+smtpd
+\-
+Postfix SMTP server
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBsmtpd\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+
+\fBsendmail \-bs\fR
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The SMTP server accepts network connection requests
+and performs zero or more SMTP transactions per connection.
+Each received message is piped through the \fBcleanup\fR(8)
+daemon, and is placed into the \fBincoming\fR queue as one
+single queue file.  For this mode of operation, the program
+expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process manager.
+
+Alternatively, the SMTP server be can run in stand\-alone
+mode; this is traditionally obtained with "\fBsendmail
+\-bs\fR".  When the SMTP server runs stand\-alone with non
+$\fBmail_owner\fR privileges, it receives mail even while
+the mail system is not running, deposits messages directly
+into the \fBmaildrop\fR queue, and disables the SMTP server's
+access policies. As of Postfix version 2.3, the SMTP server
+refuses to receive mail from the network when it runs with
+non $\fBmail_owner\fR privileges.
+
+The SMTP server implements a variety of policies for connection
+requests, and for parameters given to \fBHELO, ETRN, MAIL FROM, VRFY\fR
+and \fBRCPT TO\fR commands. They are detailed below and in the
+\fBmain.cf\fR configuration file.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The SMTP server is moderately security\-sensitive. It talks to SMTP
+clients and to DNS servers on the network. The SMTP server can be
+run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 821 (SMTP protocol)
+RFC 1123 (Host requirements)
+RFC 1652 (8bit\-MIME transport)
+RFC 1869 (SMTP service extensions)
+RFC 1870 (Message size declaration)
+RFC 1985 (ETRN command)
+RFC 2034 (SMTP enhanced status codes)
+RFC 2554 (AUTH command)
+RFC 2821 (SMTP protocol)
+RFC 2920 (SMTP pipelining)
+RFC 3030 (CHUNKING without BINARYMIME)
+RFC 3207 (STARTTLS command)
+RFC 3461 (SMTP DSN extension)
+RFC 3463 (Enhanced status codes)
+RFC 3848 (ESMTP transmission types)
+RFC 4409 (Message submission)
+RFC 4954 (AUTH command)
+RFC 5321 (SMTP protocol)
+RFC 6531 (Internationalized SMTP)
+RFC 6533 (Internationalized Delivery Status Notifications)
+RFC 7505 ("Null MX" No Service Resource Record)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+
+Depending on the setting of the \fBnotify_classes\fR parameter,
+the postmaster is notified of bounces, protocol problems,
+policy violations, and of other trouble.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as \fBsmtpd\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following parameters work around implementation errors in other
+software, and/or allow you to override standards in order to prevent
+undesirable use.
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBbroken_sasl_auth_clients (no)\fR"
+Enable interoperability with remote SMTP clients that implement an obsolete
+version of the AUTH command (RFC 4954).
+.IP "\fBdisable_vrfy_command (no)\fR"
+Disable the SMTP VRFY command.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_noop_commands (empty)\fR"
+List of commands that the Postfix SMTP server replies to with "250
+Ok", without doing any syntax checks and without changing state.
+.IP "\fBstrict_rfc821_envelopes (no)\fR"
+Require that addresses received in SMTP MAIL FROM and RCPT TO
+commands are enclosed with <>, and that those addresses do
+not contain RFC 822 style comments or phrases.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_reject_unlisted_sender (no)\fR"
+Request that the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail from unknown
+sender addresses, even when no explicit reject_unlisted_sender
+access restriction is specified.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_exceptions_networks (empty)\fR"
+What remote SMTP clients the Postfix SMTP server will not offer
+AUTH support to.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps (empty)\fR"
+Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP client address, with
+case insensitive lists of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth,
+etc.) that the Postfix SMTP server will not send in the EHLO response
+to a
+remote SMTP client.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords (empty)\fR"
+A case insensitive list of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls,
+auth, etc.) that the Postfix SMTP server will not send in the EHLO
+response
+to a remote SMTP client.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_delay_open_until_valid_rcpt (yes)\fR"
+Postpone the start of an SMTP mail transaction until a valid
+RCPT TO command is received.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids (yes)\fR"
+Force the Postfix SMTP server to issue a TLS session id, even
+when TLS session caching is turned off (smtpd_tls_session_cache_database
+is empty).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.6 and later:
+.IP "\fBtcp_windowsize (0)\fR"
+An optional workaround for routers that break TCP window scaling.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_command_filter (empty)\fR"
+A mechanism to transform commands from remote SMTP clients.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_per_record_deadline (normal: no, overload: yes)\fR"
+Change the behavior of the smtpd_timeout and smtpd_starttls_timeout
+time limits, from a
+time limit per read or write system call, to a time limit to send
+or receive a complete record (an SMTP command line, SMTP response
+line, SMTP message content line, or TLS protocol message).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_dns_reply_filter (empty)\fR"
+Optional filter for Postfix SMTP server DNS lookup results.
+.SH "ADDRESS REWRITING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+See the ADDRESS_REWRITING_README document for a detailed
+discussion of Postfix address rewriting.
+.IP "\fBreceive_override_options (empty)\fR"
+Enable or disable recipient validation, built\-in content
+filtering, or address mapping.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBlocal_header_rewrite_clients (permit_inet_interfaces)\fR"
+Rewrite message header addresses in mail from these clients and
+update incomplete addresses with the domain name in $myorigin or
+$mydomain; either don't rewrite message headers from other clients
+at all, or rewrite message headers and update incomplete addresses
+with the domain specified in the remote_header_rewrite_domain
+parameter.
+.SH "BEFORE-SMTPD PROXY AGENT"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Available in Postfix version 2.10 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_upstream_proxy_protocol (empty)\fR"
+The name of the proxy protocol used by an optional before\-smtpd
+proxy agent.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_upstream_proxy_timeout (5s)\fR"
+The time limit for the proxy protocol specified with the
+smtpd_upstream_proxy_protocol parameter.
+.SH "AFTER QUEUE EXTERNAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+As of version 1.0, Postfix can be configured to send new mail to
+an external content filter AFTER the mail is queued. This content
+filter is expected to inject mail back into a (Postfix or other)
+MTA for further delivery. See the FILTER_README document for details.
+.IP "\fBcontent_filter (empty)\fR"
+After the message is queued, send the entire message to the
+specified \fItransport:destination\fR.
+.SH "BEFORE QUEUE EXTERNAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+As of version 2.1, the Postfix SMTP server can be configured
+to send incoming mail to a real\-time SMTP\-based content filter
+BEFORE mail is queued.  This content filter is expected to inject
+mail back into Postfix.  See the SMTPD_PROXY_README document for
+details on how to configure and operate this feature.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_proxy_filter (empty)\fR"
+The hostname and TCP port of the mail filtering proxy server.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_proxy_ehlo ($myhostname)\fR"
+How the Postfix SMTP server announces itself to the proxy filter.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_proxy_options (empty)\fR"
+List of options that control how the Postfix SMTP server
+communicates with a before\-queue content filter.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_proxy_timeout (100s)\fR"
+The time limit for connecting to a proxy filter and for sending or
+receiving information.
+.SH "BEFORE QUEUE MILTER CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+As of version 2.3, Postfix supports the Sendmail version 8
+Milter (mail filter) protocol. These content filters run
+outside Postfix. They can inspect the SMTP command stream
+and the message content, and can request modifications before
+mail is queued. For details see the MILTER_README document.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_milters (empty)\fR"
+A list of Milter (mail filter) applications for new mail that
+arrives via the Postfix \fBsmtpd\fR(8) server.
+.IP "\fBmilter_protocol (6)\fR"
+The mail filter protocol version and optional protocol extensions
+for communication with a Milter application; prior to Postfix 2.6
+the default protocol is 2.
+.IP "\fBmilter_default_action (tempfail)\fR"
+The default action when a Milter (mail filter) response is
+unavailable (for example, bad Postfix configuration or Milter
+failure).
+.IP "\fBmilter_macro_daemon_name ($myhostname)\fR"
+The {daemon_name} macro value for Milter (mail filter) applications.
+.IP "\fBmilter_macro_v ($mail_name $mail_version)\fR"
+The {v} macro value for Milter (mail filter) applications.
+.IP "\fBmilter_connect_timeout (30s)\fR"
+The time limit for connecting to a Milter (mail filter)
+application, and for negotiating protocol options.
+.IP "\fBmilter_command_timeout (30s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending an SMTP command to a Milter (mail
+filter) application, and for receiving the response.
+.IP "\fBmilter_content_timeout (300s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending message content to a Milter (mail
+filter) application, and for receiving the response.
+.IP "\fBmilter_connect_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after completion of an SMTP connection.
+.IP "\fBmilter_helo_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the SMTP HELO or EHLO command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_mail_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the SMTP MAIL FROM command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_rcpt_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the SMTP RCPT TO command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_data_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to version 4 or higher Milter (mail
+filter) applications after the SMTP DATA command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_unknown_command_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to version 3 or higher Milter (mail
+filter) applications after an unknown SMTP command.
+.IP "\fBmilter_end_of_header_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the end of the message header.
+.IP "\fBmilter_end_of_data_macros (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications
+after the message end\-of\-data.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBmilter_macro_defaults (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of \fIname=value\fR pairs that specify default
+values for arbitrary macros that Postfix may send to Milter
+applications.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_milter_maps (empty)\fR"
+Lookup tables with Milter settings per remote SMTP client IP
+address.
+.SH "GENERAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following parameters are applicable for both built\-in
+and external content filters.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBreceive_override_options (empty)\fR"
+Enable or disable recipient validation, built\-in content
+filtering, or address mapping.
+.SH "EXTERNAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following parameters are applicable for both before\-queue
+and after\-queue content filtering.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_authorized_xforward_hosts (empty)\fR"
+What remote SMTP clients are allowed to use the XFORWARD feature.
+.SH "SASL AUTHENTICATION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Postfix SASL support (RFC 4954) can be used to authenticate remote
+SMTP clients to the Postfix SMTP server, and to authenticate the
+Postfix SMTP client to a remote SMTP server.
+See the SASL_README document for details.
+.IP "\fBbroken_sasl_auth_clients (no)\fR"
+Enable interoperability with remote SMTP clients that implement an obsolete
+version of the AUTH command (RFC 4954).
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_auth_enable (no)\fR"
+Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix SMTP server.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_local_domain (empty)\fR"
+The name of the Postfix SMTP server's local SASL authentication
+realm.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_security_options (noanonymous)\fR"
+Postfix SMTP server SASL security options; as of Postfix 2.3
+the list of available
+features depends on the SASL server implementation that is selected
+with \fBsmtpd_sasl_type\fR.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sender_login_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup table with the SASL login names that own the sender
+(MAIL FROM) addresses.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_exceptions_networks (empty)\fR"
+What remote SMTP clients the Postfix SMTP server will not offer
+AUTH support to.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and 2.2:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_application_name (smtpd)\fR"
+The application name that the Postfix SMTP server uses for SASL
+server initialization.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_authenticated_header (no)\fR"
+Report the SASL authenticated user name in the \fBsmtpd\fR(8) Received
+message header.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_path (smtpd)\fR"
+Implementation\-specific information that the Postfix SMTP server
+passes through to
+the SASL plug\-in implementation that is selected with
+\fBsmtpd_sasl_type\fR.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_type (cyrus)\fR"
+The SASL plug\-in type that the Postfix SMTP server should use
+for authentication.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBcyrus_sasl_config_path (empty)\fR"
+Search path for Cyrus SASL application configuration files,
+currently used only to locate the $smtpd_sasl_path.conf file.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_service (smtp)\fR"
+The service name that is passed to the SASL plug\-in that is
+selected with \fBsmtpd_sasl_type\fR and \fBsmtpd_sasl_path\fR.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_response_limit (12288)\fR"
+The maximum length of a SASL client's response to a server challenge.
+.SH "STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Detailed information about STARTTLS configuration may be
+found in the TLS_README document.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_security_level (empty)\fR"
+The SMTP TLS security level for the Postfix SMTP server; when
+a non\-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete parameters
+smtpd_use_tls and smtpd_enforce_tls.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sasl_tls_security_options ($smtpd_sasl_security_options)\fR"
+The SASL authentication security options that the Postfix SMTP
+server uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_starttls_timeout (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The time limit for Postfix SMTP server write and read operations
+during TLS startup and shutdown handshake procedures.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_CAfile (empty)\fR"
+A file containing (PEM format) CA certificates of root CAs trusted
+to sign either remote SMTP client certificates or intermediate CA
+certificates.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_CApath (empty)\fR"
+A directory containing (PEM format) CA certificates of root CAs
+trusted to sign either remote SMTP client certificates or intermediate CA
+certificates.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids (yes)\fR"
+Force the Postfix SMTP server to issue a TLS session id, even
+when TLS session caching is turned off (smtpd_tls_session_cache_database
+is empty).
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_ask_ccert (no)\fR"
+Ask a remote SMTP client for a client certificate.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_auth_only (no)\fR"
+When TLS encryption is optional in the Postfix SMTP server, do
+not announce or accept SASL authentication over unencrypted
+connections.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_ccert_verifydepth (9)\fR"
+The verification depth for remote SMTP client certificates.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_cert_file (empty)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP server RSA certificate in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers (empty)\fR"
+List of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the SMTP server
+cipher list at all TLS security levels.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_dcert_file (empty)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP server DSA certificate in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file (empty)\fR"
+File with DH parameters that the Postfix SMTP server should
+use with non\-export EDH ciphers.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_dh512_param_file (empty)\fR"
+File with DH parameters that the Postfix SMTP server should
+use with export\-grade EDH ciphers.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_dkey_file ($smtpd_tls_dcert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP server DSA private key in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_key_file ($smtpd_tls_cert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP server RSA private key in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_loglevel (0)\fR"
+Enable additional Postfix SMTP server logging of TLS activity.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers (medium)\fR"
+The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP server will
+use with mandatory TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (empty)\fR"
+Additional list of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the
+Postfix SMTP server cipher list at mandatory TLS security levels.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols (!SSLv2, !SSLv3)\fR"
+The SSL/TLS protocols accepted by the Postfix SMTP server with
+mandatory TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_received_header (no)\fR"
+Request that the Postfix SMTP server produces Received:  message
+headers that include information about the protocol and cipher used,
+as well as the remote SMTP client CommonName and client certificate issuer
+CommonName.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_req_ccert (no)\fR"
+With mandatory TLS encryption, require a trusted remote SMTP client
+certificate in order to allow TLS connections to proceed.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_wrappermode (no)\fR"
+Run the Postfix SMTP server in the non\-standard "wrapper" mode,
+instead of using the STARTTLS command.
+.IP "\fBtls_daemon_random_bytes (32)\fR"
+The number of pseudo\-random bytes that an \fBsmtp\fR(8) or \fBsmtpd\fR(8)
+process requests from the \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) server in order to seed its
+internal pseudo random number generator (PRNG).
+.IP "\fBtls_high_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "high" grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_medium_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "medium" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_low_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "low" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_export_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "export" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_null_cipherlist (eNULL:!aNULL)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "NULL" grade ciphers that provide
+authentication without encryption.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest (md5)\fR"
+The message digest algorithm to construct remote SMTP
+client\-certificate
+fingerprints or public key fingerprints (Postfix 2.9 and later)
+for \fBcheck_ccert_access\fR and \fBpermit_tls_clientcerts\fR.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.6 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_protocols (!SSLv2, !SSLv3)\fR"
+List of TLS protocols that the Postfix SMTP server will exclude
+or include with opportunistic TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_ciphers (medium)\fR"
+The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP server
+will use with opportunistic TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_eccert_file (empty)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP server ECDSA certificate in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_eckey_file ($smtpd_tls_eccert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix SMTP server ECDSA private key in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_eecdh_grade (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server security grade for ephemeral elliptic\-curve
+Diffie\-Hellman (EECDH) key exchange.
+.IP "\fBtls_eecdh_strong_curve (prime256v1)\fR"
+The elliptic curve used by the Postfix SMTP server for sensibly
+strong
+ephemeral ECDH key exchange.
+.IP "\fBtls_eecdh_ultra_curve (secp384r1)\fR"
+The elliptic curve used by the Postfix SMTP server for maximally
+strong
+ephemeral ECDH key exchange.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.8 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_preempt_cipherlist (no)\fR"
+With SSLv3 and later, use the Postfix SMTP server's cipher
+preference order instead of the remote client's cipher preference
+order.
+.IP "\fBtls_disable_workarounds (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+List or bit\-mask of OpenSSL bug work\-arounds to disable.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11 and later:
+.IP "\fBtlsmgr_service_name (tlsmgr)\fR"
+The name of the \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) service entry in master.cf.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_session_ticket_cipher (Postfix >= 3.0: aes\-256\-cbc, Postfix < 3.0: aes\-128\-cbc)\fR"
+Algorithm used to encrypt RFC5077 TLS session tickets.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_eecdh_auto_curves (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The prioritized list of elliptic curves supported by the Postfix
+SMTP client and server.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_chain_files (empty)\fR"
+List of one or more PEM files, each holding one or more private keys
+directly followed by a corresponding certificate chain.
+.IP "\fBtls_server_sni_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables that map names received from remote SMTP
+clients via the TLS Server Name Indication (SNI) extension to the
+appropriate keys and certificate chains.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5, 3.4.6, 3.3.5, 3.2.10, 3.1.13 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_fast_shutdown_enable (yes)\fR"
+A workaround for implementations that hang Postfix while shutting
+down a TLS session, until Postfix times out.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.9, 3.8.1, 3.7.6, 3.6.10, 3.5.20 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_config_file (default)\fR"
+Optional configuration file with baseline OpenSSL settings.
+.IP "\fBtls_config_name (empty)\fR"
+The application name passed by Postfix to OpenSSL library
+initialization functions.
+.SH "OBSOLETE STARTTLS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following configuration parameters exist for compatibility
+with Postfix versions before 2.3. Support for these will
+be removed in a future release.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_use_tls (no)\fR"
+Opportunistic TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients,
+but do not require that clients use TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_enforce_tls (no)\fR"
+Mandatory TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients,
+and require that clients use TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_cipherlist (empty)\fR"
+Obsolete Postfix < 2.3 control for the Postfix SMTP server TLS
+cipher list.
+.SH "SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_enable (yes)\fR"
+Enable preliminary SMTPUTF8 support for the protocols described
+in RFC 6531..6533.
+.IP "\fBstrict_smtputf8 (no)\fR"
+Enable stricter enforcement of the SMTPUTF8 protocol.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_autodetect_classes (sendmail, verify)\fR"
+Detect that a message requires SMTPUTF8 support for the specified
+mail origin classes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_idna2003_compatibility (no)\fR"
+Enable 'transitional' compatibility between IDNA2003 and IDNA2008,
+when converting UTF\-8 domain names to/from the ASCII form that is
+used for DNS lookups.
+.SH "VERP SUPPORT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+With VERP style delivery, each recipient of a message receives a
+customized copy of the message with his/her own recipient address
+encoded in the envelope sender address.  The VERP_README file
+describes configuration and operation details of Postfix support
+for variable envelope return path addresses.  VERP style delivery
+is requested with the SMTP XVERP command or with the "sendmail
+\-V" command\-line option and is available in Postfix version 1.1
+and later.
+.IP "\fBdefault_verp_delimiters (+=)\fR"
+The two default VERP delimiter characters.
+.IP "\fBverp_delimiter_filter (\-=+)\fR"
+The characters Postfix accepts as VERP delimiter characters on the
+Postfix \fBsendmail\fR(1) command line and in SMTP commands.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 1.1 and 2.0:
+.IP "\fBauthorized_verp_clients ($mynetworks)\fR"
+What remote SMTP clients are allowed to specify the XVERP command.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_authorized_verp_clients ($authorized_verp_clients)\fR"
+What remote SMTP clients are allowed to specify the XVERP command.
+.SH "TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The DEBUG_README document describes how to debug parts of the
+Postfix mail system. The methods vary from making the software log
+a lot of detail, to running some daemon processes under control of
+a call tracer or debugger.
+.IP "\fBdebug_peer_level (2)\fR"
+The increment in verbose logging level when a remote client or
+server matches a pattern in the debug_peer_list parameter.
+.IP "\fBdebug_peer_list (empty)\fR"
+Optional list of remote client or server hostname or network
+address patterns that cause the verbose logging level to increase
+by the amount specified in $debug_peer_level.
+.IP "\fBerror_notice_recipient (postmaster)\fR"
+The recipient of postmaster notifications about mail delivery
+problems that are caused by policy, resource, software or protocol
+errors.
+.IP "\fBinternal_mail_filter_classes (empty)\fR"
+What categories of Postfix\-generated mail are subject to
+before\-queue content inspection by non_smtpd_milters, header_checks
+and body_checks.
+.IP "\fBnotify_classes (resource, software)\fR"
+The list of error classes that are reported to the postmaster.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_reject_footer (empty)\fR"
+Optional information that is appended after each Postfix SMTP
+server
+4XX or 5XX response.
+.IP "\fBsoft_bounce (no)\fR"
+Safety net to keep mail queued that would otherwise be returned to
+the sender.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_authorized_xclient_hosts (empty)\fR"
+What remote SMTP clients are allowed to use the XCLIENT feature.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.10 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_log_access_permit_actions (empty)\fR"
+Enable logging of the named "permit" actions in SMTP server
+access lists (by default, the SMTP server logs "reject" actions but
+not "permit" actions).
+.SH "KNOWN VERSUS UNKNOWN RECIPIENT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+As of Postfix version 2.0, the SMTP server rejects mail for
+unknown recipients. This prevents the mail queue from clogging up
+with undeliverable MAILER\-DAEMON messages. Additional information
+on this topic is in the LOCAL_RECIPIENT_README and ADDRESS_CLASS_README
+documents.
+.IP "\fBshow_user_unknown_table_name (yes)\fR"
+Display the name of the recipient table in the "User unknown"
+responses.
+.IP "\fBcanonical_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional address mapping lookup tables for message headers and
+envelopes.
+.IP "\fBrecipient_canonical_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional address mapping lookup tables for envelope and header
+recipient addresses.
+.IP "\fBsender_canonical_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional address mapping lookup tables for envelope and header
+sender addresses.
+.PP
+Parameters concerning known/unknown local recipients:
+.IP "\fBmydestination ($myhostname, localhost.$mydomain, localhost)\fR"
+The list of domains that are delivered via the $local_transport
+mail delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBinet_interfaces (all)\fR"
+The network interface addresses that this mail system receives
+mail on.
+.IP "\fBproxy_interfaces (empty)\fR"
+The network interface addresses that this mail system receives mail
+on by way of a proxy or network address translation unit.
+.IP "\fBinet_protocols (all)\fR"
+The Internet protocols Postfix will attempt to use when making
+or accepting connections.
+.IP "\fBlocal_recipient_maps (proxy:unix:passwd.byname $alias_maps)\fR"
+Lookup tables with all names or addresses of local recipients:
+a recipient address is local when its domain matches $mydestination,
+$inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces.
+.IP "\fBunknown_local_recipient_reject_code (550)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a recipient
+address is local, and $local_recipient_maps specifies a list of
+lookup tables that does not match the recipient.
+.PP
+Parameters concerning known/unknown recipients of relay destinations:
+.IP "\fBrelay_domains (Postfix >= 3.0: empty, Postfix < 3.0: $mydestination)\fR"
+What destination domains (and subdomains thereof) this system
+will relay mail to.
+.IP "\fBrelay_recipient_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with all valid addresses in the domains
+that match $relay_domains.
+.IP "\fBunknown_relay_recipient_reject_code (550)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server reply code when a recipient
+address matches $relay_domains, and relay_recipient_maps specifies
+a list of lookup tables that does not match the recipient address.
+.PP
+Parameters concerning known/unknown recipients in virtual alias
+domains:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_alias_domains ($virtual_alias_maps)\fR"
+Postfix is final destination for the specified list of virtual
+alias domains, that is, domains for which all addresses are aliased
+to addresses in other local or remote domains.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_alias_maps ($virtual_maps)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables that alias specific mail addresses or domains
+to other local or remote address.
+.IP "\fBunknown_virtual_alias_reject_code (550)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server reply code when a recipient address matches
+$virtual_alias_domains, and $virtual_alias_maps specifies a list
+of lookup tables that does not match the recipient address.
+.PP
+Parameters concerning known/unknown recipients in virtual mailbox
+domains:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_mailbox_domains ($virtual_mailbox_maps)\fR"
+Postfix is final destination for the specified list of domains;
+mail is delivered via the $virtual_transport mail delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_mailbox_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with all valid addresses in the domains that
+match $virtual_mailbox_domains.
+.IP "\fBunknown_virtual_mailbox_reject_code (550)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server reply code when a recipient address matches
+$virtual_mailbox_domains, and $virtual_mailbox_maps specifies a list
+of lookup tables that does not match the recipient address.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following parameters limit resource usage by the SMTP
+server and/or control client request rates.
+.IP "\fBline_length_limit (2048)\fR"
+Upon input, long lines are chopped up into pieces of at most
+this length; upon delivery, long lines are reconstructed.
+.IP "\fBqueue_minfree (0)\fR"
+The minimal amount of free space in bytes in the queue file system
+that is needed to receive mail.
+.IP "\fBmessage_size_limit (10240000)\fR"
+The maximal size in bytes of a message, including envelope information.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_recipient_limit (1000)\fR"
+The maximal number of recipients that the Postfix SMTP server
+accepts per message delivery request.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_timeout (normal: 300s, overload: 10s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending a Postfix SMTP server response and for
+receiving a remote SMTP client request.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_history_flush_threshold (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of lines in the Postfix SMTP server command history
+before it is flushed upon receipt of EHLO, RSET, or end of DATA.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_peername_lookup (yes)\fR"
+Attempt to look up the remote SMTP client hostname, and verify that
+the name matches the client IP address.
+.PP
+The per SMTP client connection count and request rate limits are
+implemented in co\-operation with the \fBanvil\fR(8) service, and
+are available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_connection_count_limit (50)\fR"
+How many simultaneous connections any client is allowed to
+make to this service.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_connection_rate_limit (0)\fR"
+The maximal number of connection attempts any client is allowed to
+make to this service per time unit.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_message_rate_limit (0)\fR"
+The maximal number of message delivery requests that any client is
+allowed to make to this service per time unit, regardless of whether
+or not Postfix actually accepts those messages.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_recipient_rate_limit (0)\fR"
+The maximal number of recipient addresses that any client is allowed
+to send to this service per time unit, regardless of whether or not
+Postfix actually accepts those recipients.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_event_limit_exceptions ($mynetworks)\fR"
+Clients that are excluded from smtpd_client_*_count/rate_limit
+restrictions.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_new_tls_session_rate_limit (0)\fR"
+The maximal number of new (i.e., uncached) TLS sessions that a
+remote SMTP client is allowed to negotiate with this service per
+time unit.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_per_record_deadline (normal: no, overload: yes)\fR"
+Change the behavior of the smtpd_timeout and smtpd_starttls_timeout
+time limits, from a
+time limit per read or write system call, to a time limit to send
+or receive a complete record (an SMTP command line, SMTP response
+line, SMTP message content line, or TLS protocol message).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_auth_rate_limit (0)\fR"
+The maximal number of AUTH commands that any client is allowed to
+send to this service per time unit, regardless of whether or not
+Postfix actually accepts those commands.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.9, 3.8.1, 3.7.6, 3.6.10, 3.5.20 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_forbid_unauth_pipelining (Postfix >= 3.9: yes)\fR"
+Disconnect remote SMTP clients that violate RFC 2920 (or 5321)
+command pipelining constraints.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.9, 3.8.4, 3.7.9, 3.6.13, 3.5.23 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_forbid_bare_newline (Postfix < 3.9: no)\fR"
+Reject or restrict input lines from an SMTP client that end in
+<LF> instead of the standard <CR><LF>.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_forbid_bare_newline_exclusions ($mynetworks)\fR"
+Exclude the specified clients from smtpd_forbid_bare_newline
+enforcement.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.9, 3.8.5, 3.7.10, 3.6.14, 3.5.24 and
+later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_forbid_bare_newline_reject_code (550)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when rejecting a
+request with "smtpd_forbid_bare_newline = reject".
+.SH "TARPIT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+When a remote SMTP client makes errors, the Postfix SMTP server
+can insert delays before responding. This can help to slow down
+run\-away software.  The behavior is controlled by an error counter
+that counts the number of errors within an SMTP session that a
+client makes without delivering mail.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_error_sleep_time (1s)\fR"
+With Postfix version 2.1 and later: the SMTP server response delay after
+a client has made more than $smtpd_soft_error_limit errors, and
+fewer than $smtpd_hard_error_limit errors, without delivering mail.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_soft_error_limit (10)\fR"
+The number of errors a remote SMTP client is allowed to make without
+delivering mail before the Postfix SMTP server slows down all its
+responses.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_hard_error_limit (normal: 20, overload: 1)\fR"
+The maximal number of errors a remote SMTP client is allowed to
+make without delivering mail.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_junk_command_limit (normal: 100, overload: 1)\fR"
+The number of junk commands (NOOP, VRFY, ETRN or RSET) that a remote
+SMTP client can send before the Postfix SMTP server starts to
+increment the error counter with each junk command.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_recipient_overshoot_limit (1000)\fR"
+The number of recipients that a remote SMTP client can send in
+excess of the limit specified with $smtpd_recipient_limit, before
+the Postfix SMTP server increments the per\-session error count
+for each excess recipient.
+.SH "ACCESS POLICY DELEGATION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+As of version 2.1, Postfix can be configured to delegate access
+policy decisions to an external server that runs outside Postfix.
+See the file SMTPD_POLICY_README for more information.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_policy_service_max_idle (300s)\fR"
+The time after which an idle SMTPD policy service connection is
+closed.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_policy_service_max_ttl (1000s)\fR"
+The time after which an active SMTPD policy service connection is
+closed.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_policy_service_timeout (100s)\fR"
+The time limit for connecting to, writing to, or receiving from a
+delegated SMTPD policy server.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_policy_service_default_action (451 4.3.5 Server configuration problem)\fR"
+The default action when an SMTPD policy service request fails.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_policy_service_request_limit (0)\fR"
+The maximal number of requests per SMTPD policy service connection,
+or zero (no limit).
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_policy_service_try_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of attempts to send an SMTPD policy service
+request before giving up.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_policy_service_retry_delay (1s)\fR"
+The delay between attempts to resend a failed SMTPD policy
+service request.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_policy_service_policy_context (empty)\fR"
+Optional information that the Postfix SMTP server specifies in
+the "policy_context" attribute of a policy service request (originally,
+to share the same service endpoint among multiple check_policy_service
+clients).
+.SH "ACCESS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The SMTPD_ACCESS_README document gives an introduction to all the
+SMTP server access control features.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_delay_reject (yes)\fR"
+Wait until the RCPT TO command before evaluating
+$smtpd_client_restrictions, $smtpd_helo_restrictions and
+$smtpd_sender_restrictions, or wait until the ETRN command before
+evaluating $smtpd_client_restrictions and $smtpd_helo_restrictions.
+.IP "\fBparent_domain_matches_subdomains (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A list of Postfix features where the pattern "example.com" also
+matches subdomains of example.com,
+instead of requiring an explicit ".example.com" pattern.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_restrictions (empty)\fR"
+Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
+context of a client connection request.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_helo_required (no)\fR"
+Require that a remote SMTP client introduces itself with the HELO
+or EHLO command before sending the MAIL command or other commands
+that require EHLO negotiation.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_helo_restrictions (empty)\fR"
+Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
+context of a client HELO command.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_sender_restrictions (empty)\fR"
+Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
+context of a client MAIL FROM command.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_recipient_restrictions (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
+context of a client RCPT TO command, after smtpd_relay_restrictions.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_etrn_restrictions (empty)\fR"
+Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
+context of a client ETRN command.
+.IP "\fBallow_untrusted_routing (no)\fR"
+Forward mail with sender\-specified routing (user[@%!]remote[@%!]site)
+from untrusted clients to destinations matching $relay_domains.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_restriction_classes (empty)\fR"
+User\-defined aliases for groups of access restrictions.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_null_access_lookup_key (<>)\fR"
+The lookup key to be used in SMTP \fBaccess\fR(5) tables instead of the
+null sender address.
+.IP "\fBpermit_mx_backup_networks (empty)\fR"
+Restrict the use of the permit_mx_backup SMTP access feature to
+only domains whose primary MX hosts match the listed networks.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_data_restrictions (empty)\fR"
+Optional access restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies
+in the context of the SMTP DATA command.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_expansion_filter (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+What characters are allowed in $name expansions of RBL reply
+templates.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_reject_unlisted_sender (no)\fR"
+Request that the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail from unknown
+sender addresses, even when no explicit reject_unlisted_sender
+access restriction is specified.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_reject_unlisted_recipient (yes)\fR"
+Request that the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail for unknown
+recipient addresses, even when no explicit reject_unlisted_recipient
+access restriction is specified.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_end_of_data_restrictions (empty)\fR"
+Optional access restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server
+applies in the context of the SMTP END\-OF\-DATA command.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.10 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_relay_restrictions (permit_mynetworks, permit_sasl_authenticated, defer_unauth_destination)\fR"
+Access restrictions for mail relay control that the Postfix
+SMTP server applies in the context of the RCPT TO command, before
+smtpd_recipient_restrictions.
+.SH "SENDER AND RECIPIENT ADDRESS VERIFICATION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Postfix version 2.1 introduces sender and recipient address verification.
+This feature is implemented by sending probe email messages that
+are not actually delivered.
+This feature is requested via the reject_unverified_sender and
+reject_unverified_recipient access restrictions.  The status of
+verification probes is maintained by the \fBverify\fR(8) server.
+See the file ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README for information
+about how to configure and operate the Postfix sender/recipient
+address verification service.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_poll_count (normal: 3, overload: 1)\fR"
+How many times to query the \fBverify\fR(8) service for the completion
+of an address verification request in progress.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_poll_delay (3s)\fR"
+The delay between queries for the completion of an address
+verification request in progress.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_sender ($double_bounce_sender)\fR"
+The sender address to use in address verification probes; prior
+to Postfix 2.5 the default was "postmaster".
+.IP "\fBunverified_sender_reject_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a recipient
+address is rejected by the reject_unverified_sender restriction.
+.IP "\fBunverified_recipient_reject_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response when a recipient address
+is rejected by the reject_unverified_recipient restriction.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.6 and later:
+.IP "\fBunverified_sender_defer_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a sender address
+probe fails due to a temporary error condition.
+.IP "\fBunverified_recipient_defer_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response when a recipient address
+probe fails due to a temporary error condition.
+.IP "\fBunverified_sender_reject_reason (empty)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server's reply when rejecting mail with
+reject_unverified_sender.
+.IP "\fBunverified_recipient_reject_reason (empty)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server's reply when rejecting mail with
+reject_unverified_recipient.
+.IP "\fBunverified_sender_tempfail_action ($reject_tempfail_action)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server's action when reject_unverified_sender
+fails due to a temporary error condition.
+.IP "\fBunverified_recipient_tempfail_action ($reject_tempfail_action)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server's action when reject_unverified_recipient
+fails due to a temporary error condition.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_sender_ttl (0s)\fR"
+The time between changes in the time\-dependent portion of address
+verification probe sender addresses.
+.SH "ACCESS CONTROL RESPONSES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following parameters control numerical SMTP reply codes
+and/or text responses.
+.IP "\fBaccess_map_reject_code (554)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code for
+an \fBaccess\fR(5) map "reject" action.
+.IP "\fBdefer_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a remote SMTP
+client request is rejected by the "defer" restriction.
+.IP "\fBinvalid_hostname_reject_code (501)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when the client
+HELO or EHLO command parameter is rejected by the reject_invalid_helo_hostname
+restriction.
+.IP "\fBmaps_rbl_reject_code (554)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a remote SMTP
+client request is blocked by the reject_rbl_client, reject_rhsbl_client,
+reject_rhsbl_reverse_client, reject_rhsbl_sender or
+reject_rhsbl_recipient restriction.
+.IP "\fBnon_fqdn_reject_code (504)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server reply code when a client request
+is rejected by the reject_non_fqdn_helo_hostname, reject_non_fqdn_sender
+or reject_non_fqdn_recipient restriction.
+.IP "\fBplaintext_reject_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a request
+is rejected by the \fBreject_plaintext_session\fR restriction.
+.IP "\fBreject_code (554)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a remote SMTP
+client request is rejected by the "reject" restriction.
+.IP "\fBrelay_domains_reject_code (554)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a client
+request is rejected by the reject_unauth_destination recipient
+restriction.
+.IP "\fBunknown_address_reject_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical response code when the Postfix SMTP server rejects a
+sender or recipient address because its domain is unknown.
+.IP "\fBunknown_client_reject_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a client
+without valid address <=> name mapping is rejected by the
+reject_unknown_client_hostname restriction.
+.IP "\fBunknown_hostname_reject_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when the hostname
+specified with the HELO or EHLO command is rejected by the
+reject_unknown_helo_hostname restriction.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBdefault_rbl_reply (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default Postfix SMTP server response template for a request that is
+rejected by an RBL\-based restriction.
+.IP "\fBmulti_recipient_bounce_reject_code (550)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a remote SMTP
+client request is blocked by the reject_multi_recipient_bounce
+restriction.
+.IP "\fBrbl_reply_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with RBL response templates.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.6 and later:
+.IP "\fBaccess_map_defer_code (450)\fR"
+The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code for
+an \fBaccess\fR(5) map "defer" action, including "defer_if_permit"
+or "defer_if_reject".
+.IP "\fBreject_tempfail_action (defer_if_permit)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server's action when a reject\-type restriction
+fails due to a temporary error condition.
+.IP "\fBunknown_helo_hostname_tempfail_action ($reject_tempfail_action)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server's action when reject_unknown_helo_hostname
+fails due to a temporary error condition.
+.IP "\fBunknown_address_tempfail_action ($reject_tempfail_action)\fR"
+The Postfix SMTP server's action when reject_unknown_sender_domain
+or reject_unknown_recipient_domain fail due to a temporary error
+condition.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBcommand_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of all postfix administrative commands.
+.IP "\fBdouble_bounce_sender (double\-bounce)\fR"
+The sender address of postmaster notifications that are generated
+by the mail system.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmail_name (Postfix)\fR"
+The mail system name that is displayed in Received: headers, in
+the SMTP greeting banner, and in bounced mail.
+.IP "\fBmail_owner (postfix)\fR"
+The UNIX system account that owns the Postfix queue and most Postfix
+daemon processes.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmyhostname (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The internet hostname of this mail system.
+.IP "\fBmynetworks (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The list of "trusted" remote SMTP clients that have more privileges than
+"strangers".
+.IP "\fBmyorigin ($myhostname)\fR"
+The domain name that locally\-posted mail appears to come
+from, and that locally posted mail is delivered to.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBrecipient_delimiter (empty)\fR"
+The set of characters that can separate a user name from its
+extension (example: user+foo), or a .forward file name from its
+extension (example: .forward+foo).
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_banner ($myhostname ESMTP $mail_name)\fR"
+The text that follows the 220 status code in the SMTP greeting
+banner.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_forbidden_commands (CONNECT, GET, POST)\fR"
+List of commands that cause the Postfix SMTP server to immediately
+terminate the session with a 221 code.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_client_port_logging (no)\fR"
+Enable logging of the remote SMTP client port in addition to
+the hostname and IP address.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_reject_footer_maps (empty)\fR"
+Lookup tables, indexed by the complete Postfix SMTP server 4xx or
+5xx response, with reject footer templates.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+anvil(8), connection/rate limiting
+cleanup(8), message canonicalization
+tlsmgr(8), TLS session and PRNG management
+trivial\-rewrite(8), address resolver
+verify(8), address verification service
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+ADDRESS_CLASS_README, blocking unknown hosted or relay recipients
+ADDRESS_REWRITING_README, Postfix address manipulation
+BDAT_README, Postfix CHUNKING support
+FILTER_README, external after\-queue content filter
+LOCAL_RECIPIENT_README, blocking unknown local recipients
+MILTER_README, before\-queue mail filter applications
+SMTPD_ACCESS_README, built\-in access policies
+SMTPD_POLICY_README, external policy server
+SMTPD_PROXY_README, external before\-queue content filter
+SASL_README, Postfix SASL howto
+TLS_README, Postfix STARTTLS howto
+VERP_README, Postfix XVERP extension
+XCLIENT_README, Postfix XCLIENT extension
+XFORWARD_README, Postfix XFORWARD extension
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
+
+SASL support originally by:
+Till Franke
+SuSE Rhein/Main AG
+65760 Eschborn, Germany
+
+TLS support originally by:
+Lutz Jaenicke
+BTU Cottbus
+Allgemeine Elektrotechnik
+Universitaetsplatz 3\-4
+D\-03044 Cottbus, Germany
+
+Revised TLS support by:
+Victor Duchovni
+Morgan Stanley
diff --git a/man/man8/spawn.8 b/man/man8/spawn.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..410ec87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/spawn.8
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+.TH SPAWN 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+spawn
+\-
+Postfix external command spawner
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBspawn\fR [generic Postfix daemon options] command_attributes...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBspawn\fR(8) daemon provides the Postfix equivalent
+of \fBinetd\fR.
+It listens on a port as specified in the Postfix \fBmaster.cf\fR file
+and spawns an external command whenever a connection is established.
+The connection can be made over local IPC (such as UNIX\-domain
+sockets) or over non\-local IPC (such as TCP sockets).
+The command\'s standard input, output and error streams are connected
+directly to the communication endpoint.
+
+This daemon expects to be run from the \fBmaster\fR(8) process
+manager.
+.SH "COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The external command attributes are given in the \fBmaster.cf\fR
+file at the end of a service definition.  The syntax is as follows:
+.IP "\fBuser\fR=\fIusername\fR (required)"
+.IP "\fBuser\fR=\fIusername\fR:\fIgroupname\fR"
+The external command is executed with the rights of the
+specified \fIusername\fR.  The software refuses to execute
+commands with root privileges, or with the privileges of the
+mail system owner. If \fIgroupname\fR is specified, the
+corresponding group ID is used instead of the group ID
+of \fIusername\fR.
+.IP "\fBargv\fR=\fIcommand\fR... (required)"
+The command to be executed. This must be specified as the
+last command attribute.
+The command is executed directly, i.e. without interpretation of
+shell meta characters by a shell command interpreter.
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+In order to enforce standard Postfix process resource controls,
+the \fBspawn\fR(8) daemon runs only one external command at a time.
+As such, it presents a noticeable overhead by wasting precious
+process resources. The \fBspawn\fR(8) daemon is expected to be
+replaced by a more structural solution.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBspawn\fR(8) daemon reports abnormal child exits.
+Problems are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8) or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.fi
+.ad
+This program needs root privilege in order to execute external
+commands as the specified user. It is therefore security sensitive.
+However the \fBspawn\fR(8) daemon does not talk to the external command
+and thus is not vulnerable to data\-driven attacks.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically as \fBspawn\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+
+In the text below, \fItransport\fR is the first field of the entry
+in the \fBmaster.cf\fR file.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROL"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBtransport_time_limit ($command_time_limit)\fR"
+A transport\-specific override for the command_time_limit parameter
+value, where \fItransport\fR is the master.cf name of the message
+delivery transport.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBexport_environment (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The list of environment variables that a Postfix process will export
+to non\-Postfix processes.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmail_owner (postfix)\fR"
+The UNIX system account that owns the Postfix queue and most Postfix
+daemon processes.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/tlsmgr.8 b/man/man8/tlsmgr.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4e594c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/tlsmgr.8
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+.TH TLSMGR 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+tlsmgr
+\-
+Postfix TLS session cache and PRNG manager
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBtlsmgr\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) manages the Postfix TLS session caches.
+It stores and retrieves cache entries on request by
+\fBsmtpd\fR(8) and \fBsmtp\fR(8) processes, and periodically
+removes entries that have expired.
+
+The \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) also manages the PRNG (pseudo random number
+generator) pool. It answers queries by the \fBsmtpd\fR(8)
+and \fBsmtp\fR(8)
+processes to seed their internal PRNG pools.
+
+The \fBtlsmgr\fR(8)'s PRNG pool is initially seeded from
+an external source (EGD, /dev/urandom, or regular file).
+It is updated at configurable pseudo\-random intervals with
+data from the external source. It is updated periodically
+with data from TLS session cache entries and with the time
+of day, and is updated with the time of day whenever a
+process requests \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) service.
+
+The \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) saves the PRNG state to an exchange file
+periodically and when the process terminates, and reads
+the exchange file when initializing its PRNG.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) is not security\-sensitive. The code that maintains
+the external and internal PRNG pools does not "trust" the
+data that it manipulates, and the code that maintains the
+TLS session cache does not touch the contents of the cached
+entries, except for seeding its internal PRNG pool.
+
+The \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) can be run chrooted and with reduced privileges.
+At process startup it connects to the entropy source and
+exchange file, and creates or truncates the optional TLS
+session cache files.
+
+With Postfix version 2.5 and later, the \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) no
+longer uses root privileges when opening cache files. These
+files should now be stored under the Postfix\-owned
+\fBdata_directory\fR.  As a migration aid, an attempt to
+open a cache file under a non\-Postfix directory is redirected
+to the Postfix\-owned \fBdata_directory\fR, and a warning
+is logged.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+There is no automatic means to limit the number of entries in the
+TLS session caches and/or the size of the TLS cache files.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are not picked up automatically,
+because \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) is a persistent processes.  Use the
+command "\fBpostfix reload\fR" after a configuration change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "TLS SESSION CACHE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBlmtp_tls_loglevel (0)\fR"
+The LMTP\-specific version of the smtp_tls_loglevel
+configuration parameter.
+.IP "\fBlmtp_tls_session_cache_database (empty)\fR"
+The LMTP\-specific version of the smtp_tls_session_cache_database
+configuration parameter.
+.IP "\fBlmtp_tls_session_cache_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The LMTP\-specific version of the smtp_tls_session_cache_timeout
+configuration parameter.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_loglevel (0)\fR"
+Enable additional Postfix SMTP client logging of TLS activity.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_session_cache_database (empty)\fR"
+Name of the file containing the optional Postfix SMTP client
+TLS session cache.
+.IP "\fBsmtp_tls_session_cache_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The expiration time of Postfix SMTP client TLS session cache
+information.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_loglevel (0)\fR"
+Enable additional Postfix SMTP server logging of TLS activity.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_session_cache_database (empty)\fR"
+Name of the file containing the optional Postfix SMTP server
+TLS session cache.
+.IP "\fBsmtpd_tls_session_cache_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The expiration time of Postfix SMTP server TLS session cache
+information.
+.SH "PSEUDO RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBtls_random_source (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The external entropy source for the in\-memory \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) pseudo
+random number generator (PRNG) pool.
+.IP "\fBtls_random_bytes (32)\fR"
+The number of bytes that \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) reads from $tls_random_source
+when (re)seeding the in\-memory pseudo random number generator (PRNG)
+pool.
+.IP "\fBtls_random_exchange_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+Name of the pseudo random number generator (PRNG) state file
+that is maintained by \fBtlsmgr\fR(8).
+.IP "\fBtls_random_prng_update_period (3600s)\fR"
+The time between attempts by \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) to save the state of
+the pseudo random number generator (PRNG) to the file specified
+with $tls_random_exchange_name.
+.IP "\fBtls_random_reseed_period (3600s)\fR"
+The maximal time between attempts by \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) to re\-seed the
+in\-memory pseudo random number generator (PRNG) pool from external
+sources.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdata_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The directory with Postfix\-writable data files (for example:
+caches, pseudo\-random numbers).
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+smtp(8), Postfix SMTP client
+smtpd(8), Postfix SMTP server
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+master(5), generic daemon options
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+TLS_README, Postfix TLS configuration and operation
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.2.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Lutz Jaenicke
+BTU Cottbus
+Allgemeine Elektrotechnik
+Universitaetsplatz 3\-4
+D\-03044 Cottbus, Germany
+
+Adapted by:
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/tlsproxy.8 b/man/man8/tlsproxy.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e59c96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/tlsproxy.8
@@ -0,0 +1,390 @@
+.TH TLSPROXY 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+tlsproxy
+\-
+Postfix TLS proxy
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBtlsproxy\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server implements a two\-way TLS proxy. It
+is used by the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server to talk SMTP\-over\-TLS
+with remote SMTP clients that are not whitelisted (including
+clients whose whitelist status has expired), and by the
+\fBsmtp\fR(8) client to support TLS connection reuse, but it
+should also work for non\-SMTP protocols.
+
+Although one \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) process can serve multiple
+sessions at the same time, it is a good idea to allow the
+number of processes to increase with load, so that the
+service remains responsive.
+.SH "PROTOCOL EXAMPLE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The example below concerns \fBpostscreen\fR(8). However,
+the \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server is agnostic of the application
+protocol, and the example is easily adapted to other
+applications.
+
+After receiving a valid remote SMTP client STARTTLS command,
+the \fBpostscreen\fR(8) server sends the remote SMTP client
+endpoint string, the requested role (server), and the
+requested timeout to \fBtlsproxy\fR(8).  \fBpostscreen\fR(8)
+then receives a "TLS available" indication from \fBtlsproxy\fR(8).
+If the TLS service is available, \fBpostscreen\fR(8) sends
+the remote SMTP client file descriptor to \fBtlsproxy\fR(8),
+and sends the plaintext 220 greeting to the remote SMTP
+client.  This triggers TLS negotiations between the remote
+SMTP client and \fBtlsproxy\fR(8).  Upon completion of the
+TLS\-level handshake, \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) translates between
+plaintext from/to \fBpostscreen\fR(8) and ciphertext to/from
+the remote SMTP client.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server is moderately security\-sensitive.
+It talks to untrusted clients on the network. The process
+can be run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are not picked up automatically,
+as \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) processes may run for a long time
+depending on mail server load.  Use the command "\fBpostfix
+reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "STARTTLS GLOBAL CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following settings are global and therefore cannot be
+overruled by information specified in a \fBtlsproxy\fR(8)
+client request.
+.IP "\fBtls_append_default_CA (no)\fR"
+Append the system\-supplied default Certification Authority
+certificates to the ones specified with *_tls_CApath or *_tls_CAfile.
+.IP "\fBtls_daemon_random_bytes (32)\fR"
+The number of pseudo\-random bytes that an \fBsmtp\fR(8) or \fBsmtpd\fR(8)
+process requests from the \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) server in order to seed its
+internal pseudo random number generator (PRNG).
+.IP "\fBtls_high_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "high" grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_medium_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "medium" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_low_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "low" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_export_cipherlist (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "export" or higher grade ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtls_null_cipherlist (eNULL:!aNULL)\fR"
+The OpenSSL cipherlist for "NULL" grade ciphers that provide
+authentication without encryption.
+.IP "\fBtls_eecdh_strong_curve (prime256v1)\fR"
+The elliptic curve used by the Postfix SMTP server for sensibly
+strong
+ephemeral ECDH key exchange.
+.IP "\fBtls_eecdh_ultra_curve (secp384r1)\fR"
+The elliptic curve used by the Postfix SMTP server for maximally
+strong
+ephemeral ECDH key exchange.
+.IP "\fBtls_disable_workarounds (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+List or bit\-mask of OpenSSL bug work\-arounds to disable.
+.IP "\fBtls_preempt_cipherlist (no)\fR"
+With SSLv3 and later, use the Postfix SMTP server's cipher
+preference order instead of the remote client's cipher preference
+order.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_legacy_public_key_fingerprints (no)\fR"
+A temporary migration aid for sites that use certificate
+\fIpublic\-key\fR fingerprints with Postfix 2.9.0..2.9.5, which use
+an incorrect algorithm.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11\-3.1:
+.IP "\fBtls_dane_digest_agility (on)\fR"
+Configure RFC7671 DANE TLSA digest algorithm agility.
+.IP "\fBtls_dane_trust_anchor_digest_enable (yes)\fR"
+Enable support for RFC 6698 (DANE TLSA) DNS records that contain
+digests of trust\-anchors with certificate usage "2".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.11 and later:
+.IP "\fBtlsmgr_service_name (tlsmgr)\fR"
+The name of the \fBtlsmgr\fR(8) service entry in master.cf.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_session_ticket_cipher (Postfix >= 3.0: aes\-256\-cbc, Postfix < 3.0: aes\-128\-cbc)\fR"
+Algorithm used to encrypt RFC5077 TLS session tickets.
+.IP "\fBopenssl_path (openssl)\fR"
+The location of the OpenSSL command line program \fBopenssl\fR(1).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_eecdh_auto_curves (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The prioritized list of elliptic curves supported by the Postfix
+SMTP client and server.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_server_sni_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables that map names received from remote SMTP
+clients via the TLS Server Name Indication (SNI) extension to the
+appropriate keys and certificate chains.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5, 3.4.6, 3.3.5, 3.2.10, 3.1.13 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_fast_shutdown_enable (yes)\fR"
+A workaround for implementations that hang Postfix while shutting
+down a TLS session, until Postfix times out.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.9, 3.8.1, 3.7.6, 3.6.10, 3.5.20 and later:
+.IP "\fBtls_config_file (default)\fR"
+Optional configuration file with baseline OpenSSL settings.
+.IP "\fBtls_config_name (empty)\fR"
+The application name passed by Postfix to OpenSSL library
+initialization functions.
+.SH "STARTTLS SERVER CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+These settings are clones of Postfix SMTP server settings.
+They allow \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) to load the same certificate
+and private key information as the Postfix SMTP server,
+before dropping privileges, so that the key files can be
+kept read\-only for root. These settings can currently not
+be overruled by information in a \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client
+request, but that limitation may be removed in a future
+version.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_CAfile ($smtpd_tls_CAfile)\fR"
+A file containing (PEM format) CA certificates of root CAs
+trusted to sign either remote SMTP client certificates or intermediate
+CA certificates.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_CApath ($smtpd_tls_CApath)\fR"
+A directory containing (PEM format) CA certificates of root CAs
+trusted to sign either remote SMTP client certificates or intermediate
+CA certificates.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_always_issue_session_ids ($smtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids)\fR"
+Force the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server to issue a TLS session id,
+even when TLS session caching is turned off.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_ask_ccert ($smtpd_tls_ask_ccert)\fR"
+Ask a remote SMTP client for a client certificate.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_ccert_verifydepth ($smtpd_tls_ccert_verifydepth)\fR"
+The verification depth for remote SMTP client certificates.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_cert_file ($smtpd_tls_cert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server RSA certificate in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_ciphers ($smtpd_tls_ciphers)\fR"
+The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server
+will use with opportunistic TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_dcert_file ($smtpd_tls_dcert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server DSA certificate in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_dh1024_param_file ($smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file)\fR"
+File with DH parameters that the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server
+should use with non\-export EDH ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_dh512_param_file ($smtpd_tls_dh512_param_file)\fR"
+File with DH parameters that the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server
+should use with export\-grade EDH ciphers.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_dkey_file ($smtpd_tls_dkey_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server DSA private key in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_eccert_file ($smtpd_tls_eccert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server ECDSA certificate in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_eckey_file ($smtpd_tls_eckey_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server ECDSA private key in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_eecdh_grade ($smtpd_tls_eecdh_grade)\fR"
+The Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server security grade for ephemeral
+elliptic\-curve Diffie\-Hellman (EECDH) key exchange.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_exclude_ciphers ($smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers)\fR"
+List of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the \fBtlsproxy\fR(8)
+server cipher list at all TLS security levels.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_fingerprint_digest ($smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest)\fR"
+The message digest algorithm to construct remote SMTP
+client\-certificate
+fingerprints.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_key_file ($smtpd_tls_key_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server RSA private key in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_loglevel ($smtpd_tls_loglevel)\fR"
+Enable additional Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server logging of TLS
+activity.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_mandatory_ciphers ($smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers)\fR"
+The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server
+will use with mandatory TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers ($smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers)\fR"
+Additional list of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the
+\fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server cipher list at mandatory TLS security levels.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_mandatory_protocols ($smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols)\fR"
+The SSL/TLS protocols accepted by the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server
+with mandatory TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_protocols ($smtpd_tls_protocols)\fR"
+List of TLS protocols that the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server will
+exclude or include with opportunistic TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_req_ccert ($smtpd_tls_req_ccert)\fR"
+With mandatory TLS encryption, require a trusted remote SMTP
+client certificate in order to allow TLS connections to proceed.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_security_level ($smtpd_tls_security_level)\fR"
+The SMTP TLS security level for the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server;
+when a non\-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete
+parameters smtpd_use_tls and smtpd_enforce_tls.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_tls_chain_files ($smtpd_tls_chain_files)\fR"
+Files with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) server keys and certificate
+chains in PEM format.
+.SH "STARTTLS CLIENT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+These settings are clones of Postfix SMTP client settings.
+They allow \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) to load the same certificate
+and private key information as the Postfix SMTP client,
+before dropping privileges, so that the key files can be
+kept read\-only for root. Some settings may be overruled by
+information in a \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client request.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.4 and later:
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_CAfile ($smtp_tls_CAfile)\fR"
+A file containing CA certificates of root CAs trusted to sign
+either remote TLS server certificates or intermediate CA certificates.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_CApath ($smtp_tls_CApath)\fR"
+Directory with PEM format Certification Authority certificates
+that the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client uses to verify a remote TLS
+server certificate.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_chain_files ($smtp_tls_chain_files)\fR"
+Files with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client keys and certificate
+chains in PEM format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_cert_file ($smtp_tls_cert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client RSA certificate in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_key_file ($smtp_tls_key_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client RSA private key in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_dcert_file ($smtp_tls_dcert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client DSA certificate in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_dkey_file ($smtp_tls_dkey_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client DSA private key in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_eccert_file ($smtp_tls_eccert_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client ECDSA certificate in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_eckey_file ($smtp_tls_eckey_file)\fR"
+File with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client ECDSA private key in PEM
+format.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_fingerprint_digest ($smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest)\fR"
+The message digest algorithm used to construct remote TLS server
+certificate fingerprints.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_loglevel ($smtp_tls_loglevel)\fR"
+Enable additional Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client logging of TLS
+activity.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_loglevel_parameter (smtp_tls_loglevel)\fR"
+The name of the parameter that provides the tlsproxy_client_loglevel
+value.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_scert_verifydepth ($smtp_tls_scert_verifydepth)\fR"
+The verification depth for remote TLS server certificates.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_security_level ($smtp_tls_security_level)\fR"
+The default TLS security level for the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8)
+client.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_policy_maps ($smtp_tls_policy_maps)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client TLS
+security policy by next\-hop destination.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_use_tls ($smtp_use_tls)\fR"
+Opportunistic mode: use TLS when a remote server announces TLS
+support.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_enforce_tls ($smtp_enforce_tls)\fR"
+Enforcement mode: require that SMTP servers use TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_client_per_site ($smtp_tls_per_site)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with the Postfix \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) client TLS
+usage policy by next\-hop destination and by remote TLS server
+hostname.
+.SH "OBSOLETE STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+These parameters are supported for compatibility with
+\fBsmtpd\fR(8) legacy parameters.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_use_tls ($smtpd_use_tls)\fR"
+Opportunistic TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients,
+but do not require that clients use TLS encryption.
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_enforce_tls ($smtpd_enforce_tls)\fR"
+Mandatory TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients, and
+require that clients use TLS encryption.
+.SH "RESOURCE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBtlsproxy_watchdog_timeout (10s)\fR"
+How much time a \fBtlsproxy\fR(8) process may take to process local
+or remote I/O before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+postscreen(8), Postfix zombie blocker
+smtpd(8), Postfix SMTP server
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.8.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/trace.8 b/man/man8/trace.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..411dfa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/trace.8
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+.so man8/bounce.8
diff --git a/man/man8/trivial-rewrite.8 b/man/man8/trivial-rewrite.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..523c44c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/trivial-rewrite.8
@@ -0,0 +1,326 @@
+.TH TRIVIAL-REWRITE 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+trivial-rewrite
+\-
+Postfix address rewriting and resolving daemon
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR(8) daemon processes three types of client
+service requests:
+.IP "\fBrewrite \fIcontext address\fR"
+Rewrite an address to standard form, according to the
+address rewriting context:
+.RS
+.IP \fBlocal\fR
+Append the domain names specified with \fB$myorigin\fR or
+\fB$mydomain\fR to incomplete addresses; do \fBswap_bangpath\fR
+and \fBallow_percent_hack\fR processing as described below, and
+strip source routed addresses (\fI@site,@site:user@domain\fR)
+to \fIuser@domain\fR form.
+.IP \fBremote\fR
+Append the domain name specified with
+\fB$remote_header_rewrite_domain\fR to incomplete
+addresses. Otherwise the result is identical to that of
+the \fBlocal\fR address rewriting context. This prevents
+Postfix from appending the local domain to spam from poorly
+written remote clients.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBresolve \fIsender\fR \fIaddress\fR"
+Resolve the address to a (\fItransport\fR, \fInexthop\fR,
+\fIrecipient\fR, \fIflags\fR) quadruple. The meaning of
+the results is as follows:
+.RS
+.IP \fItransport\fR
+The delivery agent to use. This is the first field of an entry
+in the \fBmaster.cf\fR file.
+.IP \fInexthop\fR
+The host to send to and optional delivery method information.
+.IP \fIrecipient\fR
+The envelope recipient address that is passed on to \fInexthop\fR.
+.IP \fIflags\fR
+The address class, whether the address requires relaying,
+whether the address has problems, and whether the request failed.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBverify \fIsender\fR \fIaddress\fR"
+Resolve the address for address verification purposes.
+.SH "SERVER PROCESS MANAGEMENT"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR(8) servers run under control by
+the Postfix master
+server.  Each server can handle multiple simultaneous connections.
+When all servers are busy while a client connects, the master
+creates a new server process, provided that the trivial\-rewrite
+server process limit is not exceeded.
+Each trivial\-rewrite server terminates after
+serving at least \fB$max_use\fR clients of after \fB$max_idle\fR
+seconds of idle time.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+None. The command does not interact with the outside world.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR(8) daemon is not security sensitive.
+By default, this daemon does not talk to remote or local users.
+It can run at a fixed low privilege in a chrooted environment.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+On busy mail systems a long time may pass before a \fBmain.cf\fR
+change affecting \fBtrivial\-rewrite\fR(8) is picked up. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBresolve_dequoted_address (yes)\fR"
+Resolve a recipient address safely instead of correctly, by
+looking inside quotes.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix version 2.1 and later:
+.IP "\fBresolve_null_domain (no)\fR"
+Resolve an address that ends in the "@" null domain as if the
+local hostname were specified, instead of rejecting the address as
+invalid.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBresolve_numeric_domain (no)\fR"
+Resolve "user@ipaddress" as "user@[ipaddress]", instead of
+rejecting the address as invalid.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBallow_min_user (no)\fR"
+Allow a sender or recipient address to have `\-' as the first
+character.
+.SH "ADDRESS REWRITING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBmyorigin ($myhostname)\fR"
+The domain name that locally\-posted mail appears to come
+from, and that locally posted mail is delivered to.
+.IP "\fBallow_percent_hack (yes)\fR"
+Enable the rewriting of the form "user%domain" to "user@domain".
+.IP "\fBappend_at_myorigin (yes)\fR"
+With locally submitted mail, append the string "@$myorigin" to mail
+addresses without domain information.
+.IP "\fBappend_dot_mydomain (Postfix >= 3.0: no, Postfix < 3.0: yes)\fR"
+With locally submitted mail, append the string ".$mydomain" to
+addresses that have no ".domain" information.
+.IP "\fBrecipient_delimiter (empty)\fR"
+The set of characters that can separate a user name from its
+extension (example: user+foo), or a .forward file name from its
+extension (example: .forward+foo).
+.IP "\fBswap_bangpath (yes)\fR"
+Enable the rewriting of "site!user" into "user@site".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 2.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBremote_header_rewrite_domain (empty)\fR"
+Don't rewrite message headers from remote clients at all when
+this parameter is empty; otherwise, rewrite message headers and
+append the specified domain name to incomplete addresses.
+.SH "ROUTING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The following is applicable to Postfix version 2.0 and later.
+Earlier versions do not have support for: virtual_transport,
+relay_transport, virtual_alias_domains, virtual_mailbox_domains
+or proxy_interfaces.
+.IP "\fBlocal_transport (local:$myhostname)\fR"
+The default mail delivery transport and next\-hop destination
+for final delivery to domains listed with mydestination, and for
+[ipaddress] destinations that match $inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_transport (virtual)\fR"
+The default mail delivery transport and next\-hop destination for
+final delivery to domains listed with $virtual_mailbox_domains.
+.IP "\fBrelay_transport (relay)\fR"
+The default mail delivery transport and next\-hop destination for
+remote delivery to domains listed with $relay_domains.
+.IP "\fBdefault_transport (smtp)\fR"
+The default mail delivery transport and next\-hop destination for
+destinations that do not match $mydestination, $inet_interfaces,
+$proxy_interfaces, $virtual_alias_domains, $virtual_mailbox_domains,
+or $relay_domains.
+.IP "\fBparent_domain_matches_subdomains (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A list of Postfix features where the pattern "example.com" also
+matches subdomains of example.com,
+instead of requiring an explicit ".example.com" pattern.
+.IP "\fBrelayhost (empty)\fR"
+The next\-hop destination of non\-local mail; overrides non\-local
+domains in recipient addresses.
+.IP "\fBtransport_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with mappings from recipient address to
+(message delivery transport, next\-hop destination).
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBsender_dependent_relayhost_maps (empty)\fR"
+A sender\-dependent override for the global relayhost parameter
+setting.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBempty_address_relayhost_maps_lookup_key (<>)\fR"
+The sender_dependent_relayhost_maps search string that will be
+used instead of the null sender address.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBempty_address_default_transport_maps_lookup_key (<>)\fR"
+The sender_dependent_default_transport_maps search string that
+will be used instead of the null sender address.
+.IP "\fBsender_dependent_default_transport_maps (empty)\fR"
+A sender\-dependent override for the global default_transport
+parameter setting.
+.SH "ADDRESS VERIFICATION CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Postfix version 2.1 introduces sender and recipient address verification.
+This feature is implemented by sending probe email messages that
+are not actually delivered.
+By default, address verification probes use the same route
+as regular mail. To override specific aspects of message
+routing for address verification probes, specify one or more
+of the following:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_local_transport ($local_transport)\fR"
+Overrides the local_transport parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_virtual_transport ($virtual_transport)\fR"
+Overrides the virtual_transport parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_relay_transport ($relay_transport)\fR"
+Overrides the relay_transport parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_default_transport ($default_transport)\fR"
+Overrides the default_transport parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_relayhost ($relayhost)\fR"
+Overrides the relayhost parameter setting for address verification
+probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_transport_maps ($transport_maps)\fR"
+Overrides the transport_maps parameter setting for address verification
+probes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_sender_dependent_relayhost_maps ($sender_dependent_relayhost_maps)\fR"
+Overrides the sender_dependent_relayhost_maps parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_sender_dependent_default_transport_maps ($sender_dependent_default_transport_maps)\fR"
+Overrides the sender_dependent_default_transport_maps parameter
+setting for address verification probes.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBempty_address_recipient (MAILER\-DAEMON)\fR"
+The recipient of mail addressed to the null address.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBrelocated_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with new contact information for users or
+domains that no longer exist.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBshow_user_unknown_table_name (yes)\fR"
+Display the name of the recipient table in the "User unknown"
+responses.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBhelpful_warnings (yes)\fR"
+Log warnings about problematic configuration settings, and provide
+helpful suggestions.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+transport(5), transport table format
+relocated(5), format of the "user has moved" table
+master(8), process manager
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+ADDRESS_CLASS_README, Postfix address classes howto
+ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README, Postfix address verification
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/verify.8 b/man/man8/verify.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c1fab0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/verify.8
@@ -0,0 +1,257 @@
+.TH VERIFY 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+verify
+\-
+Postfix address verification server
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBverify\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBverify\fR(8) address verification server maintains a record
+of what recipient addresses are known to be deliverable or
+undeliverable.
+
+Addresses are verified by injecting probe messages into the
+Postfix queue. Probe messages are run through all the routing
+and rewriting machinery except for final delivery, and are
+discarded rather than being deferred or bounced.
+
+Address verification relies on the answer from the nearest
+MTA for the specified address, and will therefore not detect
+all undeliverable addresses.
+
+The \fBverify\fR(8) server is designed to run under control
+by the Postfix
+master server. It maintains an optional persistent database.
+To avoid being interrupted by "postfix stop" in the middle
+of a database update, the process runs in a separate process
+group.
+
+The \fBverify\fR(8) server implements the following requests:
+.IP "\fBupdate\fI address status text\fR"
+Update the status and text of the specified address.
+.IP "\fBquery\fI address\fR"
+Look up the \fIstatus\fR and \fItext\fR for the specified
+\fIaddress\fR.
+If the status is unknown, a probe is sent and an "in progress"
+status is returned.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The address verification server is not security\-sensitive. It does
+not talk to the network, and it does not talk to local users.
+The verify server can run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
+
+The address verification server can be coerced to store
+unlimited amounts of garbage. Limiting the cache expiry
+time
+trades one problem (disk space exhaustion) for another
+one (poor response time to client requests).
+
+With Postfix version 2.5 and later, the \fBverify\fR(8)
+server no longer uses root privileges when opening the
+\fBaddress_verify_map\fR cache file. The file should now
+be stored under the Postfix\-owned \fBdata_directory\fR.  As
+a migration aid, an attempt to open a cache file under a
+non\-Postfix directory is redirected to the Postfix\-owned
+\fBdata_directory\fR, and a warning is logged.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+Address verification probe messages add additional traffic
+to the mail queue.
+Recipient verification may cause an increased load on
+down\-stream servers in the case of a dictionary attack or
+a flood of backscatter bounces.
+Sender address verification may cause your site to be
+blacklisted by some providers.
+
+If the persistent database ever gets corrupted then the world
+comes to an end and human intervention is needed. This violates
+a basic Postfix principle.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are not picked up automatically,
+as \fBverify\fR(8)
+processes are long\-lived. Use the command "\fBpostfix reload\fR" after
+a configuration change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "PROBE MESSAGE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_sender ($double_bounce_sender)\fR"
+The sender address to use in address verification probes; prior
+to Postfix 2.5 the default was "postmaster".
+.PP
+Available with Postfix 2.9 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_sender_ttl (0s)\fR"
+The time between changes in the time\-dependent portion of address
+verification probe sender addresses.
+.SH "CACHE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_map (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+Lookup table for persistent address verification status
+storage.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_positive_expire_time (31d)\fR"
+The time after which a successful probe expires from the address
+verification cache.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_positive_refresh_time (7d)\fR"
+The time after which a successful address verification probe needs
+to be refreshed.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_negative_cache (yes)\fR"
+Enable caching of failed address verification probe results.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_negative_expire_time (3d)\fR"
+The time after which a failed probe expires from the address
+verification cache.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_negative_refresh_time (3h)\fR"
+The time after which a failed address verification probe needs to
+be refreshed.
+.PP
+Available with Postfix 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_cache_cleanup_interval (12h)\fR"
+The amount of time between \fBverify\fR(8) address verification
+database cleanup runs.
+.SH "PROBE MESSAGE ROUTING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+By default, probe messages are delivered via the same route
+as regular messages.  The following parameters can be used to
+override specific message routing mechanisms.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_relayhost ($relayhost)\fR"
+Overrides the relayhost parameter setting for address verification
+probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_transport_maps ($transport_maps)\fR"
+Overrides the transport_maps parameter setting for address verification
+probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_local_transport ($local_transport)\fR"
+Overrides the local_transport parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_virtual_transport ($virtual_transport)\fR"
+Overrides the virtual_transport parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_relay_transport ($relay_transport)\fR"
+Overrides the relay_transport parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_default_transport ($default_transport)\fR"
+Overrides the default_transport parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 2.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_sender_dependent_relayhost_maps ($sender_dependent_relayhost_maps)\fR"
+Overrides the sender_dependent_relayhost_maps parameter setting for address
+verification probes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 2.7 and later:
+.IP "\fBaddress_verify_sender_dependent_default_transport_maps ($sender_dependent_default_transport_maps)\fR"
+Overrides the sender_dependent_default_transport_maps parameter
+setting for address verification probes.
+.SH "SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
+.IP "\fBsmtputf8_autodetect_classes (sendmail, verify)\fR"
+Detect that a message requires SMTPUTF8 support for the specified
+mail origin classes.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.2 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_idna2003_compatibility (no)\fR"
+Enable 'transitional' compatibility between IDNA2003 and IDNA2008,
+when converting UTF\-8 domain names to/from the ASCII form that is
+used for DNS lookups.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+smtpd(8), Postfix SMTP server
+cleanup(8), enqueue Postfix message
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+.na
+.nf
+ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README, address verification howto
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.1.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
diff --git a/man/man8/virtual.8 b/man/man8/virtual.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a3525a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/man8/virtual.8
@@ -0,0 +1,358 @@
+.TH VIRTUAL 8 
+.ad
+.fi
+.SH NAME
+virtual
+\-
+Postfix virtual domain mail delivery agent
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.na
+.nf
+\fBvirtual\fR [generic Postfix daemon options]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent is designed for virtual mail
+hosting services. Originally based on the Postfix \fBlocal\fR(8)
+delivery
+agent, this agent looks up recipients with map lookups of their
+full recipient address, instead of using hard\-coded unix password
+file lookups of the address local part only.
+
+This delivery agent only delivers mail.  Other features such as
+mail forwarding, out\-of\-office notifications, etc., must be
+configured via virtual_alias maps or via similar lookup mechanisms.
+.SH "MAILBOX LOCATION"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The mailbox location is controlled by the \fBvirtual_mailbox_base\fR
+and \fBvirtual_mailbox_maps\fR configuration parameters (see below).
+The \fBvirtual_mailbox_maps\fR table is indexed by the recipient
+address as described under TABLE SEARCH ORDER below.
+
+The mailbox pathname is constructed as follows:
+
+.nf
+  \fB$virtual_mailbox_base/$virtual_mailbox_maps(\fIrecipient\fB)\fR
+.fi
+
+where \fIrecipient\fR is the full recipient address.
+.SH "UNIX MAILBOX FORMAT"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+When the mailbox location does not end in \fB/\fR, the message
+is delivered in UNIX mailbox format.   This format stores multiple
+messages in one textfile.
+
+The \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent prepends a "\fBFrom \fIsender
+time_stamp\fR" envelope header to each message, prepends a
+\fBDelivered\-To:\fR message header with the envelope recipient
+address,
+prepends an \fBX\-Original\-To:\fR header with the recipient address as
+given to Postfix,
+prepends a \fBReturn\-Path:\fR message header with the
+envelope sender address, prepends a \fB>\fR character to lines
+beginning with "\fBFrom \fR", and appends an empty line.
+
+The mailbox is locked for exclusive access while delivery is in
+progress. In case of problems, an attempt is made to truncate the
+mailbox to its original length.
+.SH "QMAIL MAILDIR FORMAT"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+When the mailbox location ends in \fB/\fR, the message is delivered
+in qmail \fBmaildir\fR format. This format stores one message per file.
+
+The \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent prepends a \fBDelivered\-To:\fR
+message header with the final envelope recipient address,
+prepends an \fBX\-Original\-To:\fR header with the recipient address as
+given to Postfix, and prepends a
+\fBReturn\-Path:\fR message header with the envelope sender address.
+
+By definition, \fBmaildir\fR format does not require application\-level
+file locking during mail delivery or retrieval.
+.SH "MAILBOX OWNERSHIP"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Mailbox ownership is controlled by the \fBvirtual_uid_maps\fR
+and \fBvirtual_gid_maps\fR lookup tables, which are indexed
+with the full recipient address. Each table provides
+a string with the numerical user and group ID, respectively.
+
+The \fBvirtual_minimum_uid\fR parameter imposes a lower bound on
+numerical user ID values that may be specified in any
+\fBvirtual_uid_maps\fR.
+.SH "CASE FOLDING"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+All delivery decisions are made using the full recipient
+address, folded to lower case. See also the next section
+for a few exceptions with optional address extensions.
+.SH "TABLE SEARCH ORDER"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Normally, a lookup table is specified as a text file that
+serves as input to the \fBpostmap\fR(1) command. The result, an
+indexed file in \fBdbm\fR or \fBdb\fR format, is used for fast
+searching by the mail system.
+
+The search order is as follows. The search stops
+upon the first successful lookup.
+.IP \(bu
+When the recipient has an optional address extension the
+\fIuser+extension@domain.tld\fR address is looked up first.
+.sp
+With Postfix versions before 2.1, the optional address extension
+is always ignored.
+.IP \(bu
+The \fIuser@domain.tld\fR address, without address extension,
+is looked up next.
+.IP \(bu
+Finally, the recipient \fI@domain\fR is looked up.
+.PP
+When the table is provided via other means such as NIS, LDAP
+or SQL, the same lookups are done as for ordinary indexed files.
+
+Alternatively, a table can be provided as a regular\-expression
+map where patterns are given as regular expressions. In that case,
+only the full recipient address is given to the regular\-expression
+map.
+.SH "SECURITY"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent is not security sensitive, provided
+that the lookup tables with recipient user/group ID information are
+adequately protected. This program is not designed to run chrooted.
+
+The \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent disallows regular expression
+substitution of $1 etc. in regular expression lookup tables,
+because that would open a security hole.
+
+The \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent will silently ignore requests
+to use the \fBproxymap\fR(8) server. Instead it will open the
+table directly. Before Postfix version 2.2, the virtual
+delivery agent will terminate with a fatal error.
+.SH "STANDARDS"
+.na
+.nf
+RFC 822 (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.ad
+.fi
+Mail bounces when the recipient has no mailbox or when the
+recipient is over disk quota. In all other cases, mail for
+an existing recipient is deferred and a warning is logged.
+
+Problems and transactions are logged to \fBsyslogd\fR(8)
+or \fBpostlogd\fR(8).
+Corrupted message files are marked so that the queue
+manager can move them to the \fBcorrupt\fR queue afterwards.
+
+Depending on the setting of the \fBnotify_classes\fR parameter,
+the postmaster is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
+.SH BUGS
+.ad
+.fi
+This delivery agent supports address extensions in email
+addresses and in lookup table keys, but does not propagate
+address extension information to the result of table lookup.
+
+Postfix should have lookup tables that can return multiple result
+attributes. In order to avoid the inconvenience of maintaining
+three tables, use an LDAP or MYSQL database.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+Changes to \fBmain.cf\fR are picked up automatically, as
+\fBvirtual\fR(8)
+processes run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command
+"\fBpostfix reload\fR" to speed up a change.
+
+The text below provides only a parameter summary. See
+\fBpostconf\fR(5) for more details including examples.
+.SH "MAILBOX DELIVERY CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBvirtual_mailbox_base (empty)\fR"
+A prefix that the \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent prepends to all pathname
+results from $virtual_mailbox_maps table lookups.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_mailbox_maps (empty)\fR"
+Optional lookup tables with all valid addresses in the domains that
+match $virtual_mailbox_domains.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_minimum_uid (100)\fR"
+The minimum user ID value that the \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent accepts
+as a result from $virtual_uid_maps table lookup.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_uid_maps (empty)\fR"
+Lookup tables with the per\-recipient user ID that the \fBvirtual\fR(8)
+delivery agent uses while writing to the recipient's mailbox.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_gid_maps (empty)\fR"
+Lookup tables with the per\-recipient group ID for \fBvirtual\fR(8) mailbox
+delivery.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_mailbox_domains ($virtual_mailbox_maps)\fR"
+Postfix is final destination for the specified list of domains;
+mail is delivered via the $virtual_transport mail delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_transport (virtual)\fR"
+The default mail delivery transport and next\-hop destination for
+final delivery to domains listed with $virtual_mailbox_domains.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 2.5.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBstrict_mailbox_ownership (yes)\fR"
+Defer delivery when a mailbox file is not owned by its recipient.
+.SH "LOCKING CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBvirtual_mailbox_lock (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+How to lock a UNIX\-style \fBvirtual\fR(8) mailbox before attempting
+delivery.
+.IP "\fBdeliver_lock_attempts (20)\fR"
+The maximal number of attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a
+mailbox file or \fBbounce\fR(8) logfile.
+.IP "\fBdeliver_lock_delay (1s)\fR"
+The time between attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a mailbox
+file or \fBbounce\fR(8) logfile.
+.IP "\fBstale_lock_time (500s)\fR"
+The time after which a stale exclusive mailbox lockfile is removed.
+.SH "RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBvirtual_mailbox_limit (51200000)\fR"
+The maximal size in bytes of an individual \fBvirtual\fR(8) mailbox or
+maildir file, or zero (no limit).
+.PP
+Implemented in the qmgr(8) daemon:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_destination_concurrency_limit ($default_destination_concurrency_limit)\fR"
+The maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same destination
+via the virtual message delivery transport.
+.IP "\fBvirtual_destination_recipient_limit ($default_destination_recipient_limit)\fR"
+The maximal number of recipients per message for the virtual
+message delivery transport.
+.SH "MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+.IP "\fBconfig_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf
+configuration files.
+.IP "\fBdaemon_timeout (18000s)\fR"
+How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a
+request before it is terminated by a built\-in watchdog timer.
+.IP "\fBdelay_logging_resolution_limit (2)\fR"
+The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
+sub\-second delay values.
+.IP "\fBipc_timeout (3600s)\fR"
+The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
+communication channel.
+.IP "\fBmax_idle (100s)\fR"
+The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
+for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBmax_use (100)\fR"
+The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
+process will service before terminating voluntarily.
+.IP "\fBprocess_id (read\-only)\fR"
+The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBprocess_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.
+.IP "\fBqueue_directory (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+The location of the Postfix top\-level queue directory.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_facility (mail)\fR"
+The syslog facility of Postfix logging.
+.IP "\fBsyslog_name (see 'postconf -d' output)\fR"
+A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog
+records, so that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.0 and later:
+.IP "\fBvirtual_delivery_status_filter ($default_delivery_status_filter)\fR"
+Optional filter for the \fBvirtual\fR(8) delivery agent to change the
+delivery status code or explanatory text of successful or unsuccessful
+deliveries.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix version 3.3 and later:
+.IP "\fBenable_original_recipient (yes)\fR"
+Enable support for the original recipient address after an
+address is rewritten to a different address (for example with
+aliasing or with canonical mapping).
+.IP "\fBservice_name (read\-only)\fR"
+The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process.
+.PP
+Available in Postfix 3.5 and later:
+.IP "\fBinfo_log_address_format (external)\fR"
+The email address form that will be used in non\-debug logging
+(info, warning, etc.).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.na
+.nf
+qmgr(8), queue manager
+bounce(8), delivery status reports
+postconf(5), configuration parameters
+postlogd(8), Postfix logging
+syslogd(8), system logging
+.SH "README_FILES"
+.na
+.nf
+Use "\fBpostconf readme_directory\fR" or
+"\fBpostconf html_directory\fR" to locate this information.
+VIRTUAL_README, domain hosting howto
+.SH "LICENSE"
+.na
+.nf
+.ad
+.fi
+The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
+.SH HISTORY
+.ad
+.fi
+.ad
+.fi
+This delivery agent was originally based on the Postfix local delivery
+agent. Modifications mainly consisted of removing code that either
+was not applicable or that was not safe in this context: aliases,
+~user/.forward files, delivery to "|command" or to /file/name.
+
+The \fBDelivered\-To:\fR message header appears in the \fBqmail\fR
+system by Daniel Bernstein.
+
+The \fBmaildir\fR structure appears in the \fBqmail\fR system
+by Daniel Bernstein.
+.SH "AUTHOR(S)"
+.na
+.nf
+Wietse Venema
+IBM T.J. Watson Research
+P.O. Box 704
+Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA
+
+Wietse Venema
+Google, Inc.
+111 8th Avenue
+New York, NY 10011, USA
+
+Andrew McNamara
+andrewm@connect.com.au
+connect.com.au Pty. Ltd.
+Level 3, 213 Miller St
+North Sydney 2060, NSW, Australia